Contents

Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2015 Operating Instructions PDF

1 of 298
1 of 298

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2015 Operating Instructions PDF

COMAND Operating Instructions

Order no. 6515 7776 13 Part no. 222 584 40 02 Edition B-2015

2225844002 2225844002

CO MA

ND Op

era tin

gI ns tru

cti on s

Publication details Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites:

Editorial office

Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG Mercedesstrae 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany

Symbols In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- lowing symbols:

G WARNING

Warning notices draw your attention to haz- ards that endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with infor- mation on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.

i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes- sion indicate an instruction with sev- eral steps.

(Y page)

This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.

Dis play

This font indicates a display in the multifunction display/COMAND dis- play.

As at 18.09.2013

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center if you have further questions. The Operator's Manual and all supplements are integral parts of the vehicle. You should always keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.

2225844002 2225844002

Index ....................................................... 4

Operating safety ................................. 14

At a glance ........................................... 17

System settings .................................. 43

Vehicle functions ................................ 57

Navigation ........................................... 75

Telephone .......................................... 135

Online and Internet functions .......... 171

Radio .................................................. 197

Media ................................................. 209

Sound ................................................. 249

Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 259

SIRIUS Weather ................................ 281

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ... 360 camera

Displaying images ............................ 73 Settings ........................................... 72 Switching on/off .............................. 72

911 emergency call .......................... 137

A Access data of the mobile phone network provider

Deleting ......................................... 177 Editing ........................................... 177 Making entries ............................... 175 Selecting ........................................ 174

Acoustic locking confirmation Activating/deactivating (COMAND) ....................................... 60

Adding bookmarks ............................ 192 Address book

Adding a new contact .................... 164 Adding information to a contact .... 164 Automatically importing contacts from the phone .............................. 167 Browsing ........................................ 163 Calling up ....................................... 163 Changing the category of an entry .. 166 Changing the display and sorting criteria for contacts ....................... 167 Deleting contacts ........................... 168 Deleting imported contacts ........... 169 Displaying contact details .............. 164 Editing a contact ............................ 166 Entering characters ......................... 36 Importing contacts ........................ 168 Introduction ................................... 162 Making a call ................................. 165 Receiving vCards ........................... 169 Saving a contact ............................ 167 Searching for a contact ................. 163 Sending e-mails ............................. 165 Sending text messages .................. 165 Starting route guidance ................. 165 Storing a phone number as a speed dial number ......................... 166 Voice tag ....................................... 166

Address entry menu ............................ 83

Adjusting the volume COMAND ......................................... 25 Traffic announcements .................... 25

Alternative Route .............................. 110 Ambient lighting

Setting (COMAND) ........................... 58 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode

Activating ....................................... 215 Gracenote Media Database ......... 218 Playback options ........................... 216 Switching to (Rear Seat Entertain- ment System) ................................ 274

Automatic folding mirror function Activating/deactivating (COMAND) ....................................... 60

Automatic locking feature Activating/deactivating (COMAND) ....................................... 61

Automatic time Switching on/off .............................. 46

Automatic volume adjustment Switching on/off .............................. 52

AUX (audio) Notes/socket ................................ 237 Switching to ................................... 238

AUX jacks CD/DVD drive ............................... 264

Avoiding an area ................................ 127

B Back button ......................................... 24 Bluetooth

Activating/deactivating ................... 51 Activating audio mode ................... 232 Connecting another mobile phone .. 141 Connecting audio devices .............. 228 De-authorizing (de-registering) a device ............................................ 231 Device list ...................................... 229 Displaying connection details ........ 142 Entering the passcode ................... 140 External authorization (audio device) ........................................... 230 Increasing the volume using COMAND ....................................... 233 Interface ........................................ 136

4 Index

Reconnecting an audio device ....... 230 Searching for a mobile phone ........ 139 Starting playback if the Blue- tooth audio device has been stopped ......................................... 232 Telephony ...................................... 138 Telephony notes ............................ 136

Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system

Balance/fader ............................... 255 Calling up the sound menu ............ 254 Changing the loudspeaker source .. 256 Equalizer ........................................ 255 Equipment ..................................... 254 Setting the sound profile ............... 257 VIP & BAL selection ....................... 256

Burmester surround sound sys- tem

Balance/fader ............................... 253 Calling up the sound menu ............ 252 Changing the loudspeaker source .. 253 Equalizer ........................................ 252 Equipment ..................................... 252 Surround sound ............................. 254

Buttons and controller ........................ 23

C Call lists

Displaying details ........................... 152 Opening and selecting an entry ..... 152 Saving an entry in the address book .............................................. 152

Camera Rear view camera ............................ 73

Car pool lanes ...................................... 82 Category list (music search) ............ 221 CD

Inserting ........................................ 212 Inserting/loading (DVD changer) ... 213 Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 273 Notes on discs ............................... 220 Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 273

Selecting a track ............................ 217 Sound settings (balance, bass, fader, treble) .................................. 250

Characters Entering (navigation) ........................ 37

Climate control Calling up climate control (COMAND) ....................................... 68 Calling up the climate control bar .... 67 Climate control bar (COMAND) ........ 67 Cooling with air dehumidification (COMAND) ....................................... 68 Ionization (COMAND) ....................... 71 Perfume atomizer (COMAND) .......... 70 Rear-compartment climate control (COMAND) ........................... 69 Setting the air distribution (COMAND) ....................................... 68 Setting the airflow (COMAND) ......... 67 Setting the climate mode (COMAND) ....................................... 70 Setting the departure time (COMAND) ....................................... 71 Setting the footwell temperature (COMAND) ....................................... 70 Setting the temperature (COMAND) ....................................... 67 Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 68

Climate control bar Calling up ......................................... 67

COMAND Active multicontour seat .................. 64 Basic functions ................................ 25 Controller ......................................... 23 Display ............................................. 20 Multicontour seat ............................ 64 Seat functions .................................. 63 Settings ......................................... 192 Switching on/off .............................. 25 Telephone keypad overview ............. 24

COMAND display Additional display area ..................... 45 Cleaning instructions ....................... 22 Setting ............................................. 44

Contacts Deleting ......................................... 168 Importing ....................................... 168

Index 5

Cordless headphones Setting the volume ......................... 266

Country-specific information (nav- igation) ............................................... 125

D Date format, setting ............................ 47 Day design, setting ............................. 44 Delayed switch-off time

Setting (COMAND) ........................... 61 Deleting

Call lists ......................................... 153 Destination

Storing in the address book ........... 118 Destination/route download

Changing the vehicle identifica- tion number (VIN) .......................... 184 Deleting a destination from the server ............................................ 184 Displaying destinations in the vehicle ........................................... 182 Displaying the vehicle identifica- tion number (VIN) .......................... 184 Importing destinations ................... 183 Placing a call at the destination ..... 183 Procedure and general information .. 182 Sending destinations to the server .. 182 Using a destination for route guid- ance ............................................... 183 Using destinations ......................... 183

Destination (navigation) Entering a destination using the map ................................................. 93 Entering a point of interest .............. 89 Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 97 Entering using Mercedes-Benz Apps ................................................ 96 Keyword search ............................... 87 Saving ............................................ 117 Selecting an address book con- tact as a destination ........................ 89 Selecting from the list of last des- tinations ........................................... 88

Dialing a number (telephone) ........... 143 Display

Selecting the design ........................ 44

DVD Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 273 Notes on discs ............................... 220 Removing/ejecting (DVDchanger) .. 214 Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 273

E EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Activating/deactivating (COMAND) ....................................... 59

E-mail Answering ...................................... 160 Calling up the settings menu ......... 155 Changing the name of the e-mail account .......................................... 156 Configuring an e-mail account ....... 156 Configuring the e-mails displayed .. 156 Deactivating the e-mail function .... 156 Deleting ......................................... 162 Displaying details ........................... 158 Downloading e-mails manually ...... 156 Editing text templates .................... 160 Forwarding ..................................... 160 Reading .......................................... 157 Saving the sender in the address book .............................................. 162 Settings ......................................... 155 Storing the sender as a new entry in the address book ....................... 161 Using a phone number in the text .. 161 Using text templates ...................... 160 Writing ........................................... 159

E-mails Inbox .............................................. 157

Entering the address (example) ......... 84 Entering the city .................................. 84

F Factory setting (reset function) ......... 55 Favorites

Adding ............................................. 41 Deleting ........................................... 42 Displaying and calling up ................. 41 Moving ............................................. 42

6 Index

Overview .......................................... 41 Renaming ......................................... 42

Favorites (Internet) ........................... 194 Favorites button .................................. 52

G Google Local Search

Calling up Local Search ................. 179 Calling up Settings ......................... 181 Deleting search queries ................. 181 Entering a search position and search term ................................... 179 Setting the search radius ............... 181

Google Local Search Importing a destination/route ....... 180 Popular Searches ........................... 180 Search history ............................... 180 Using as the destination ................ 180

GPS reception ...................................... 76 Gracenote Media Database ............ 218

H Handwriting recognition

Touchpad ......................................... 32 Heading up (navigation) ................... 121 Headphones

Changing batteries ........................ 267 Home address

Entering and saving ......................... 85

I Incident (traffic report) ..................... 113 Indicator lamp

Remote control .............................. 263 Interior motion sensor

Activating/deactivating (COMAND) ....................................... 62

Intermediate destinations Accepting for the route .................... 96 Creating ........................................... 94 Editing .............................................. 95 Entering ........................................... 94 Searching for a gas station when the fuel level is low .......................... 96

Internet Conditions for access .................... 173 Creating favorites .......................... 194 Entering the URL ............................ 190 Favorites manager ......................... 194 Favorites menu .............................. 194 Menu functions .............................. 191 Options menu ................................ 191 Selecting/setting access data ....... 173 Setting automatic disconnection of the Internet connection ............. 178 Setting up an Internet connection .. 173

Internet radio Calling up ....................................... 189 Searching for stations .................... 189

L Lane recommendations

Explanation .................................... 105 Presentation .................................. 105

Lights Setting the ambient lighting (COMAND) ....................................... 58

List of access data New provider ................................. 175

List of mobile phone network pro- viders

With the selected provider ............. 175 Locator lighting

Setting (COMAND) ........................... 61 Lumbar support

Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 64

M Map (navigation)

Adjusting the scale ........................ 120 Building images ............................. 125 Elevation modeling ........................ 125 Heading ......................................... 121 Map settings .................................. 120 Moving ............................................. 79 North orientation ........................... 121 Notes ............................................. 120 Rotating the 3D map ...................... 124 Updating ........................................ 130

Map functions .................................... 120

Index 7

Massage Selecting a program ......................... 65

Media Interface Mode ............................................. 234 Playback options ........................... 237 Search ........................................... 236 Selecting music files ...................... 236 Switching to Media Interface ......... 235 Video function ............................... 237

Media Register Basic display .................................. 224 Calling upmemory space informa- tion ................................................ 227 Copying files .................................. 224 Deleting all files ............................. 226 Renaming/deleting files ................ 226 Selecting a playback mode ............ 227 Switching on .................................. 223

Media search Category list .................................. 221 Current tracklist ............................ 221 Keyword search ............................. 222 Music genres ................................. 222 Selecting by cover ......................... 222 Starting the media search .............. 220

Menu overview CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 213

Mercedes-Benz Apps ......................... 187 Microphone, switching on/off ......... 145 Mobile phone

Authorizing .................................... 140 Connecting (Bluetooth interface) .. 138 Connecting another mobile phone .. 141 De-authorizing ............................... 142 Displaying Bluetooth connection details ............................................ 142 Enabling for Internet access .......... 174

MP3 Copyright ....................................... 220 Notes ............................................. 219 Safety notes .................................. 212

MP3 mode Stop and playback function ........... 217

Multi-Seat Entertainment System Adjusting sound settings ............... 269 AUX mode ...................................... 280 Changing the picture format .......... 270

Cordless headphones .................... 266 Overview ........................................ 260 Picture settings .............................. 270 Replacing batteries ........................ 267 Setting the brightness ................... 270 Setting the color ............................ 270 Setting the contrast ....................... 270 System settings ............................. 268 Video DVD mode ........................... 276

N Navigation

Adjusting the volume of the navi- gation announcements .................... 25 Alternative route ............................ 110 Avoiding an area ............................ 127 Basic settings .................................. 80 Blocking a route section affected by a traffic jam ............................... 112 Calling up the compass display ..... 130 Calling up the menu ....................... 130 Drive Information ........................... 131 Entering a destination ...................... 83 Entering a destination using the map ................................................. 93 Entering a point of interest .............. 89 Entering characters (character bar) .................................................. 37 GPS reception .................................. 76 Important safety notes .................... 76 Info on navigation .......................... 131 Lane recommendation ................... 105 Off-road/off-map (off-road desti- nation) ........................................... 112 Online map display ........................ 130 Reading out traffic reports ............. 117 Repeating announcements ............ 107 Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations ..................... 88 Setting route options (avoiding: highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer- ries) ................................................. 80 Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................... 80 Showing/hiding the menu ............... 78 Starting route calculation ................ 86

8 Index

Switching announcements on/off .. 107 Switching to ..................................... 78

Navigation announcements Switching off .................................... 26

North orientation (navigation) ......... 121

O Off-road .............................................. 112 Online and Internet functions

Calling up the device list ................ 176 Destination/routes download ........ 181 Enabling a mobile phone for Inter- net access ..................................... 174 Ending the connection ................... 178 Establishing a connection .............. 178 Further Mercedes-Benz Apps ......... 187 Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network pro- vider .............................................. 175 Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website ..... 187 Options menu ................................ 188 Resetting settings .......................... 188 Selecting the access data of the mobile phone network provider ..... 174 Setting automatic disconnection of the Internet connection ............. 178 Setting up an Internet connection .. 173 Web browser .................................. 190

P Panel heating

Activating/deactivating (COMAND) ....................................... 59

Parental control Locking/unlocking rear compart- ment displays .................................. 72 Switching the rear compartment displays on/off ................................ 72

Pause function Video DVD ..................................... 245

Perfume atomizer Setting the perfume intensity (COMAND) ....................................... 70

Personal POIs and routes Alert when approaching (personal POI) .................................................. 98 Editing ........................................... 100 Recording the route ....................... 101 Saving .............................................. 98 Selecting .......................................... 99 Settings for personal POIs ............... 97

Phone book Adding a new contact .................... 150 Adding information to a contact .... 150 Calling up ....................................... 148 Deleting a contact ......................... 151 Displaying the details of an entry ... 149 Entering characters ......................... 36 Icon overview ................................. 148 Saving a contact ............................ 150 Searching for a contact ................. 148

Phone call Dialing ........................................... 143

Picture viewer Changing view ............................... 247 Displaying pictures ........................ 246 Exiting the picture viewer .............. 247

POI (navigation) Category .......................................... 91 Defining the position for the POI search .............................................. 90 Entering ........................................... 89

Previous destinations (navigation) .. 119

Q Quick access for audio and tele- phone

Changing the audio source .............. 34 Changing the station/music track ... 34 Sending DTMF tones ........................ 35

R Radio

Overview ........................................ 198 Setting the waveband .................... 199 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) ............................................ 202

Index 9

Storing stations ............................. 201 Tagging music tracks (download- ing/purchasing tracks from the iTunes Store) ................................. 200

Radio station Storing ........................................... 201

Read-aloud function Automatic ...................................... 117

Read-aloud function for e-mails ....... 158 Real-time traffic reports ................... 113 Rear-compartment screens .............. 261 Rear Seat Entertainment System

Adjusting sound settings ............... 269 Adjusting the brightness ................ 270 Adjusting the color ........................ 270 Adjusting the contrast ................... 270 AUX jacks ...................................... 264 AUX mode ...................................... 280 Changing the batteries .................. 267 Changing the picture format .......... 270 Cordless headphones .................... 266 Overview ........................................ 260 Picture settings .............................. 270 System settings ............................. 268 Video DVD mode ........................... 276

Rear view camera Displaying the image ........................ 73 Object detection .............................. 74 Switching object detection on/off ... 74

Receiving vCards ............................... 169 Redialing (telephone) ........................ 144 Remote control

Button lighting ............................... 262 Multi-Seat Entertainment System .. 261 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 261

Reserve fuel level Switching the function on/off in COMAND ......................................... 81

Resetting (factory settings) ............... 55 Route (navigation)

Selecting an alternative route ........ 110 Setting route options (avoiding: highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer- ries) ................................................. 80

Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................... 80 Starting calculation .......................... 86

Route guidance Continue ........................................ 109 Freeway information ...................... 106 General notes ................................ 101 Lane recommendations ................. 105 Off-road ......................................... 112 Traffic reports ................................ 113

S Safety notes

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 212 Using the telephone .............. 136, 172 Video DVD mode ........................... 240

SatRadio Channel list updates ...................... 207 Displaying information ................... 207 Memory functions .......................... 205 Music and sports alerts ................. 206 Notes ............................................. 202 Registering .................................... 203 Selecting a category ...................... 204 Selecting a channel ....................... 205 Switching to ................................... 204 Tagging music tracks ..................... 206

Screen Selecting for remote operation ...... 262

SD memory card Inserting ........................................ 215

Seat-belt adjustment function Activating/deactivating (COMAND) ....................................... 60

Seats Adjusting the lumbar support (COMAND) ....................................... 64 Balance (seat heating) ..................... 65 Massage function ............................ 65 Resetting settings ............................ 66 Seat functions (COMAND) ............... 63 Selecting for adjustment (COMAND) ....................................... 63

Selecting stations Radio ............................................. 199

Selecting the country .......................... 84

10 Index

Sending DTMF tones ......................... 146 Setting access data

Online and Internet ........................ 174 Settings

Sound settings ............................... 250 Setting the audio format

Multi-Seat Entertainment System .. 279 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 279

Setting the language COMAND ......................................... 52 Multi-Seat Entertainment System .. 279 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 279

Setting the night design ..................... 44 Setting the text reader speed ............ 48 Setting the volume

Telephone calls ................................ 25 SIRIUS weather display

5-day forecast ................................ 282 Daily forecast ................................. 282 Detail information .......................... 283 Information chart ........................... 282 Selecting the area for the weather forecast ......................................... 283 Switching on/off ........................... 282 Weather map ................................. 286

SIRIUS weather map Storm Guide .................................. 292 Storm Watch Box ........................... 292

Sound Switching on/off .............................. 26

Sound settings Balance/fader ............................... 251 Calling up the sound menu ............ 250 Changing the loudspeaker source .. 251 Equalizer ........................................ 250

Speed dial Deleting ......................................... 154 Setting up ...................................... 154

SPLITVIEW Switching on/off .............................. 28 Transferring a destination to the driver ............................................... 29

Station list ......................................... 201 Stop function

Video DVD ..................................... 245 Storing stations

Radio ............................................. 201

Switching between summer time and standard time ............................... 46 Switching on media mode

Starting at a different seat ............. 212 Using the Media button ................. 210 Via the device list .......................... 211 Via the main function bar ............... 211 Via the number keypad .................. 211

System settings Automatic volume adjustment ......... 51 Bluetooth ....................................... 51 Date ................................................. 46 Importing/exporting data ................ 54 Language ......................................... 52 Text reader speed ............................ 48 Time ................................................. 46 Time zone ........................................ 46 Voice Control System ...................... 48

T Telephone

Accepting a call (COMAND) ........... 143 Adding a call .................................. 145 Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 25 Authorizing a mobile phone (con- necting) ......................................... 140 Call lists ......................................... 151 Calls with several participants ....... 146 Call waiting .................................... 147 Conference calls ............................ 146 Connecting a mobile phone (gen- eral information) ............................ 138 De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile phone ................................. 142 Deleting a speed dial preset .......... 154 Deleting messages ........................ 162 Displaying Bluetooth connection details ............................................ 142 Downloading messages manually .. 156 E-mail ............................................. 155 E-mail conditions ........................... 155 E-mail settings ............................... 155 Ending an active call ...................... 147 Entering a number ......................... 143 Entering phone numbers ................ 143 Establishing the connection from the mobile phone ........................... 141

Index 11

Function restrictions ...................... 137 Functions available during a call .... 145 General notes ................................ 136 Incoming call during an existing call ................................................. 147 Making a call ................................. 143 Message conditions ....................... 155 Message settings ........................... 155 Operating options .......................... 137 Phone book .................................... 147 Reading messages ......................... 157 Reception and transmission vol- ume ............................................... 142 Reconnecting a mobile phone automatically ................................. 141 Rejecting a call (COMAND) ............ 143 Safety notes .......................... 136, 172 Sending DTMF tones ...................... 146 Setting up a speed dial .................. 154 Switching between calls (call wait- ing) ................................................ 146 Switching betweenmobile phones .. 141 Switching the microphone on/off .. 145 Telephone menu overview ............. 137 Text message conditions ............... 155 Text messages (SMS) .................... 155 Text message settings ................... 155 Toggling ......................................... 146 Using the telephone ....................... 143 Writing e-mails ............................... 159 Writing text messages ................... 158

Telephone keypad overview COMAND ......................................... 24

Telephone mode Redialing ........................................ 144

Telephone number Entering ......................................... 143

Text messages Calling up the settings menu ......... 155 Configuring the text messages displayed ....................................... 156 Displaying details ........................... 158 Downloading manually ................... 156 Editing text templates .................... 160 Inbox .............................................. 157 Settings ......................................... 155 Using a phone number in the text .. 161

Using text templates ...................... 160 Writing ........................................... 158

Text messages (SMS) Calling the sender .......................... 161 Deleting ......................................... 162 Reading .......................................... 157 Reading aloud ................................ 158 Storing sender in address book ..... 162 Storing the sender as a new address book entry ........................ 161

Time Setting ............................................. 47 Setting the format ............................ 47 Setting the time ............................... 47 Setting the time/date format .......... 47 Setting the time zone ....................... 46 Switching automatic time on/off ..... 46

Touchpad Calling up quick access for audio and telephone .................................. 31 Changing the audio source .............. 34 Changing the input language for handwriting recognition ................... 33 Changing the station/music track ... 34 Character suggestions ..................... 33 Deleting characters ......................... 33 Entering a space .............................. 33 Entering characters ......................... 32 Gesture control ................................ 30 Handwriting recognition ................... 32 Hiding the quick access for audio and telephone .................................. 31 Moving the map ............................... 31 Operating the touchpad ................... 30 Overview .......................................... 30 Quick access for audio and tele- phone .............................................. 34 Switching input line ......................... 33 Zooming in on the map .................... 32 Zooming out of the map ................... 32

Tow-away alarm Arming/deactivating (COMAND) ..... 62

Track information .............................. 275 Traffic jam function ........................... 112

12 Index

Traffic reports Calling up a list .............................. 115 Reading out on route ..................... 117 Real-time traffic report .................. 116

Trunk lid opening height restric- tion

Activating/deactivating (COMAND) ....................................... 63

U Updating the digital map .................. 130 USB audio mode

Selecting a track ............................ 217 USB devices

Connecting to theMedia Interface .. 215

V Vehicle settings ................................... 58 Video

see Video DVD Video-AUX

Connecting an external video source ............................................ 239 Switching to ................................... 239

Video DVD Control option ................................ 241 DVD's control menu ...................... 243 DVD functions ............................... 244 DVD menu ..................................... 244 Function restrictions ...................... 241 Menu options ................................. 242 Notes on discs ............................... 240 Operation ....................................... 240 Overview ........................................ 242 Pause function ............................... 245 Picture settings .............................. 243 Playing conditions .......................... 241 Safety notes .................................. 240 Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 245 Stop function ................................. 245 Switching to ................................... 241 Video menu ................................... 244

Voice Control System Settings ........................................... 48

Volume, adjusting Navigation messages ....................... 25

W Weather forecast

Calling up ....................................... 185 Displaying a saved location ........... 187 Information chart overview ............ 185 Saving a location ........................... 186 Selecting a location from the information chart ........................... 186 Weather map overview .................. 186

Weather map (SIRIUS) Calling up ....................................... 286 Legend ........................................... 291 Moving ........................................... 286 Showing/hiding layers ................... 286 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 286 Time stamp .................................... 291

Weather memory (SIRIUS) Selecting an area ........................... 285 Storing an area .............................. 285

Web browser Entering a web address ................. 190

WLAN Activating ......................................... 49 Connecting the device ..................... 49

Index 13

Important safety notes

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- tronics, the general operating permit is ren- dered invalid.

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND. COMAND calculates the route to the destina- tion without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stopping zone

Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges COMAND can give incorrect navigation com- mands if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes in an area. For example, a routemay have been diverted or the direction of a one- way street may have changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg- ulations always have priority over the sys- tem's driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of con- sulting the map display for directions. Look- ing at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio fre- quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple- ment C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 8 inches (20cm) and more between the radiator and a person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs.)

14 Operating safety

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USAonly: Thewireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- ation is subject to the following two condi- tions: 1) These devices may not cause interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com- pliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canada only: The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Correct use

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the following informationwhen using COMAND: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Roof antenna functionality (telephone, satel- lite radio, GPS) can be affected by the use of roof carrier systems. Attaching metalized retrofit film to the wind- shield may affect radio reception and have a negative impact on all other antennas (e.g. emergency antenna) in the vehicle interior. Protection against theft: this device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on pro- tection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Data stored in the vehicle

A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or perma- nently store technical information about: RThe vehicle's operating state RIncidents RMalfunctions In general, this technical information docu- ments the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system compo- nents, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelera- tor pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important sys- tem components, e.g. lights, brakes Rmalfunctions in important system compo- nents. e.g. lights, brakes

Operating safety 15

Z

Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera- ture

This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognizing and rectifying mal- functions and defects Rassist in recognizing and rectifying mal- functions Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- dent Roptimize vehicle function The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- mation can be read from the event datamem- ory and malfunction data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranties Rquality assurance It is read by employees of the service network (including manufacturers) using special diag- nostic devices. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a malfunction has been rectified, the information is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if neces- sary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer

allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency.

Qualified specialist workshop

Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Information on copyright

General information Information on licenses for free and Open Source software used in your vehicle and in the electronic components can be found on this website: http://www.mercedes- benz.com/opensource.

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailablewhile the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect.

16 Operating safety

COMAND features ............................... 18 Overview .............................................. 19 Basic COMAND functions ................... 25 SPLITVIEW ........................................... 27 Touchpad ............................................. 30 Rear Seat Entertainment System ...... 35 Character entry (telephony) ............... 36 Character entry (navigation) .............. 37 Favorites .............................................. 41

17

At a gl an ce

COMAND features

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

18 COMAND features At

a gl an ce

Overview

Components

: COMAND display ; DVD changer/single DVD drive = Controller and buttons The image shows the equipment with telephone keypad. COMAND consists of: Rthe COMAND display The COMAND display has 1440 x 540 pixels. Rthe DVD changer/single DVD drive Rthe controller Rthe touch-sensitive telephone keypad or the touchpad Rthe buttons Rports in the center console (2x USB, AUX) An iPod is connected via USB cable. Rheadphones for the front passenger (cordless or connected bymeans of a cable to the audio jack in the footwell)

i COMAND can be operated from the front-passenger side using the corresponding remote control if your vehicle is equipped with the front-passenger entertainment system. The COMAND display can show separate information for the driver and the front passenger. The front passenger views the display in SPLITVIEW.

Functions RHD FM radio/HD AM radio/satellite radio

Internet radio, see Communication RMedia

- Media support: audio CD, MP3 CD, DVD video, 2 x USB, SD card, iPod, Bluetooth

Overview 19

At a gl an ce

audio, 10 GBMedia Register on the hard drive

- Music search using all media RSound system You can select from three sound systems: - Standard sound system - Burmester surround sound system - Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system for ultimate listening pleasure

RNavigation system - Destination entry using keyword search - Realistic 3D map with textured city mod- els

- Personal POIs and routes using SDmem- ory card

- Navigation functions for passengers, such as Drive Information and Google Maps

- Dynamic route guidance via SIRIUS sat- ellite radio

RCommunication - Messaging functions (text messages, email)

- Address book - Internet browser - Mercedes-Benz Apps with Google Local Search, Destination Download, Weather, Facebook, Google Street View, Internet radio, stock prices, news and much more

- WiFi interface for the connection of a smartphone to COMAND and the option of remote control for the front passenger (SPLITVIEW) and the Rear Seat Entertain- ment System

- Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website - WiFi hotspot functionality to connect a tablet PC or laptop in order to enable access to the Internet using the custom- er's mobile phone

RSIRIUS Weather - Weather data as an information chart (current forecast, 5-day preview, detailed information)

- Weather data on the weather map, e.g. rain radar data, storm characteristics and the track of tropical cyclones (hurri- canes, typhoons)

RVehicle functions - Vehicle settings, such as ambient light- ing, belt adjustment and tow-away alarm

- 360 camera - Rear view camera - Climate control functions, such as cli- mate mode, perfume atomizer and aux- iliary heating

- Setting the multicontour seat with new massage program

RFavorites button Fast access to up to twelve favorites func- tions using the favorites button and num- ber keys on the telephone keypad (if avail- able) or the favorites button on the touch- pad (if available). RMulti-Seat Entertainment System

- All passengers have access to entertain- ment options via COMAND

- Digital remote control operation and dig- ital cordless headphones

COMAND display

General notes

! Do not use the space in front of the dis- play for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature- controlled switch-off feature. The brightness

20 Overview At

a gl an ce

is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely.

Overview 21

At a gl an ce

Overview

Example: audio CD mode basic display : Status bar with time, can show other displays ; Main display field = Climate control status display ? Context display in additional display area

Cleaning instructions

! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth.

The COMAND display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start clean- ing. Clean the display screen, when neces- sary, with a commercially availablemicrofiber cloth and cleaning agent for TFT/LCD dis- plays. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage. Then, dry the surface with a dry microfiber cloth. Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or abrasive cleaning agents. These could dam- age the display surface.

22 Overview At

a gl an ce

Buttons and controller

Overview

: Switches COMAND on/off ; Adjusts the volume or mutes = Telephone keypad ? Back button A Seat adjustment button B Navigation button C Radio button D Media button E Telephone, address book and Internet button F Vehicle and system settings button G Controller H g Favorites button The image shows the equipment with telephone keypad.

Overview 23

At a gl an ce

: Switches COMAND on/off ; Adjusts the volume or mutes = Touchpad ? Back button A Seat adjustment button B Navigation button C Radio button D Media button E Telephone, address book and Internet button F Vehicle and system settings button G Controller The image shows the equipment with touchpad.

Back button You can use the% button to exit amenu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the% button. COMAND changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode.

X To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds. COMAND changes to the basic display of the current operating mode.

Telephone keypad The telephone keypad is touch-sensitive: as soon as one or several of the keys are gently touched, the telephone keypad is shown in the COMAND display. The key being touched is highlighted. Alternatively, COMAND may be equipped with a touchpad.

Controller The controller is used to: Rselect menu items from the COMAND dis- play Renter characters

24 Overview At

a gl an ce

Renter a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned Rslid left or right1 Rslid forwards or back4 Rslid diagonally2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held

Touchpad Alternatively, COMAND may be equipped with a touchpad instead of a telephone key- pad. As an alternative to the controller, the touch- pad enables menu items to be selected and character entry including handwriting recog- nition, for example. X To activate the touchpad: press the sur- face of the touchpad.

Further information (Y page 30)

Basic COMAND functions

Switching COMAND on/off X Press theu button on the center con- sole to the right of the controller. When you switch on COMAND, a warning message will appear. COMAND calls up the previously selected menu. If you switch off COMAND, playback of the current media source will also be switched off.

Adjusting the volume

Adjusting the volume formedia sources X Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the controller.

or X Press theW orX button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel. The volume of the media source currently selected changes.

Adjusting the volume for traffic announcements and navigation announcements During traffic or navigation announcements: X Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the controller.

or X Press theW orX button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel.

i You can set the volume for navigation announcements to be different from the volume of the respective media source.

Adjusting the volume for phone calls You can adjust the volume for hands-free mode during a telephone call. X Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the controller.

or X Press theW orX button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel.

i Setting the volume for the Voice Control System voice output, see the separate operating instructions.

Basic COMAND functions 25

At a gl an ce

Switching the sound on or off

Media source sound X Press the thumbwheel beside the control- ler.

or X Press the8 button on the multifunction steering wheel.

i If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the8 symbol. If you switch the media source or change the volume, the sound is automatically switched on.

i Even if the sound is switched off, you will still hear navigation system announce- ments.

Switching navigation announcements off and on again X To switch off navigation announce- ments: press the thumbwheel beside the controller during the announcement. The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated message appears.

X To switch navigation announcements back on: switch COMAND off and then on again (Y page 25).

or X Start a new route calculation (Y page 86). or X Select+: while route guidance is active, show the menu and press the controller (Y page 107).

Function menu

X Press the button or the , $, %, or button. Media: the basic display for the last media source set appears. Navigation: the map or the last navigation menu called up appears. Radio: the basic menu of the last radio mode set appears. Communication: the basic menu of the last communication function set appears (telephone, address book, Internet). Vehicle functions: the basic display appears.

X For radio, media and telephone: press the $, or % button repeatedly. The menu for the available radio modes, media sources or communication functions is displayed.

X To show the menu: slide4 the con- troller. The menu for the selected functions appears. Depending on the operation, the

26 Basic COMAND functions At

a gl an ce

marking is shown inmain function bar: or menu bar;.

X To select a menu item: turn and press the controller. Once you have selected a menu item in:, the last menu set for the selected function appears. Menu bar; provides options in the cur- rent media mode.

Selecting operating modes, sources and functions You can call up available modes, sources or functions for the functions of the main func- tion bar. Example: in the communication menu, you can: Rswitch to telephone mode Rcall up the address book Rcall up the Internet Rcall up the digital operating instructions for the telephone/

X Press the % button. If telephone mode was the last mode selected, the last telephone display selected will appear.

X To select Tel/: slide5 and press the controller. The menu appears. Phone is at the front.

X To select Internet, for instance, turn and press the controller. The Internet basic display appears.

SPLITVIEW

Method of operation SPLITVIEW allows you to simultaneously use different COMAND functions on the front- passenger side and on the driver's side. Dif- ferent content is seen depending on your per- spective when viewing the display. The navigation function, for example, can be used from the driver's side while a video is watched from the front-passenger side. SPLITVIEW is operated with the COMAND remote control from the front-passenger side. To do so, use the special radio headphones. Using the headphones on the correct sides ensures an optimal sound. You can connect your own headphones to a special headphones jack. You can use the COMAND remote control to operate them.

Points to remember RYou can only adjust the volume for the headphones supplied, directly on the head- phones. ROnly entertainment functions, i.e. audio, TV, video and Internet, for example, may be used with SPLITVIEW. RVideos cannot be shown on the driver's side while the vehicle is in motion. RIf media from different sources are used, these can be used separately from the driv- er's and front-passenger sides. Example: if a medium from the DVD changer is being played on the driver's side, then another medium that is also played from the DVD changer cannot be played separately on the front-passenger side. However, other media can be used on the front-passenger side at the same time, including the radio, memory card, MEDIA REGISTER, Media Interface, USB or AUX. RIf you use the same medium on both sides, you can both carry out the respective set- tings. The "last one wins" principle applies

SPLITVIEW 27

At a gl an ce

here, i.e. the last setting activated is favored. RThe Internet can be separately used by both the driver and front passenger at the same time. RInternet can only be used if it is set and connected via a mobile phone on the driv- er's side. RThe multifunction steering wheel can only be used for functions which relate to the driver's side. RThe driver can lock/unlock the other screens (override feature) (Y page 72).

Switching SPLITVIEW on/off

From the driver's side

: SPLITVIEW switched on ; To switch SPLITVIEW on/off Activating X Press the button. The Vehicle menu appears.

X Slide6 the controller. The menu bar is shown.

X To select ICON_SplitView On: turn and press the controller. SPLITVIEW symbol: appears. The display changes to Off;. The front passenger sees the display of the function last activated. If the switch-on time was longer than 30 minutes previ- ously, the display from the driver's side is shown.

Deactivating X To select Off in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The display changes to ICON_SplitView On. is hidden in the status bar.

Locking/unlocking SPLITVIEW X Proceed as described under "Locking/ unlocking the rear-compartment displays" (Y page 72). Instead of selecting a rear- compartment display, select SplitView.

From the front-passenger side

Activating X To select the SPLITVIEW display using the COMAND remote control (Y page 261): turn thumbwheel: until the SPLITVIEW icon appears in the window.

X Press theu button on the COMAND remote control.

Deactivating X Press theu button on the COMAND remote control again. The display changes to ICON_SplitView On. The SPLITVIEW symbol is hidden in the sta- tus bar.

28 SPLITVIEW At

a gl an ce

The menu called up on the driver's side is shown.

If COMAND is switched off by removing the key from the ignition lock while SPLITVIEW is activated and then switched on again within 30 minutes, SPLITVIEW is activated with the last settings. If COMAND is switched on again after more than 30 minutes, SPLITVIEW is not activated. If SPLITVIEW is activated on the front- passenger side, the settings from the driver's side will be used.

From media mode

SPLITVIEW can be switched on from any media mode. Activating X From any media mode, e.g. Media Inter- face: slide6 the controller. The menu bar is shown.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select Start Application at Other Seat. A menu appears.

X Select SplitView. A window with the Starting Source in SplitView message appears. SPLITVIEW switches on. The symbol appears in the status bar.

Deactivating X From the driver's side, use the button (Y page 28).

X From the front-passenger side, use the COMAND remote control.

Additional options X To select Additional Options in the menu: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To switch SPLITVIEW on/off: proceed as described under "Switching the rear-com- partment displays on/off" (Y page 72). Instead of selecting a rear-compartment display, select SplitView.

X To lock/unlock SPLITVIEW: proceed as described under "Locking/unlocking the rear-compartment displays" (Y page 72). Instead of selecting a rear-compartment display, select SplitView.

Transferring a destination to the driver Using SPLITVIEW you can select a destination from the front-passenger side and transfer this to the driver's side. X Switch on SPLITVIEW (Y page 28). X To select ICON_SplitView On in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The SPLITVIEW symbol appears in the dis- play and the display switches to Off.

X Select in the main function bar with the COMAND remote control. A menu appears.

X Using the COMAND remote control, select Mercedes-Benz Apps. You see the selection of Mercedes-Benz Apps.

X Select Google Local Search with the COMAND remote control (Y page 179). A menu appears.

X Select a search position, e.g. In the Vicinity of the Destination. A menu appears.

SPLITVIEW 29

At a gl an ce

X Select a type of search inquiry, such as Enter search term. An input field appears.

X Enter the destination using the COMAND remote control and press theb button. The Google results list appears.

X Select the destination using the COMAND remote control. A menu appears.

X Select Set as Destination. X The prompt Accept the navigation data from Mercedes-Benz Apps? appears on the driver's side.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the navigation data is used for route guidance.

Touchpad

Touchpad overview

: Touch-sensitive surface ; Favorites button = Calls up quick access for audio and tele-

phone ? Back button Using the touchpad, you can: Rselect menu items in the display (Y page 30). Renter characters (handwriting recognition) (Y page 32). Rcontrol the active audio source (Y page 34). Rcreate, manage and call up favorites (Y page 41).

Renter destinations in navigation Rsave entries Further information on operating the touch- pad (Y page 30). Do not press your fingers too hard on the touchpad. Do not use any sharp objects on the touchpad. This can lead to damage to the touchpad or to malfunctions.

Operating the touchpad

Selecting a menu item

X Use one finger to touch the touch-sensitive surface.

X Glide your finger up, down, to the left or right. The selection in the display moves in accordance with the direction of move- ment.

You can navigate in lists or menus in this way.

Confirming your selection

30 Touchpad At

a gl an ce

X Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive surface until you reach the pressure point. A menu, an option or an application is started.

Calling up quick access for audio and telephone

X Use two fingers to touch the lower part of the touch-sensitive surface.

X Glide your fingers up. Quick access is displayed.

Further information on quick access for audio and telephone (Y page 34).

Hiding the quick access for audio and telephone

X Use two fingers to touch the touch-sensi- tive surface.

X Glide your fingers down. Quick access is hidden.

Operating the control for vehicle and sound settings

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two fingers, spaced slightly apart.

X Turn both fingers clockwise. The control setting is increased.

or X Turn both fingers counter-clockwise. The control setting is decreased.

Moving the map

X Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive surface until you reach the pressure point. The crosshair is shown.

Touchpad 31

At a gl an ce

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface again with one finger.

X Glide your finger in any direction. The map is moved is the direction of move- ment.

Zooming in on the map

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two fingers, spaced slightly apart.

X Glide your fingers away from each other. The map scale is magnified.

Zooming out of the map

X Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two fingers, spaced far apart.

X Glide your fingers towards each other. The map scale is reduced.

Handwriting recognition

Handwriting recognition overview You can use handwriting recognition for text, numbers or characters in any input line.

: Active input line ; Enters a space (Y page 33) = Illustration of the touch-sensitive surface ? Deletes characters (Y page 33) If the character that you have entered can be interpreted in different ways, these options are displayed. More information on the char- acter suggestions (Y page 33).

: Back ; To return to handwriting recognition = To use the phone book or text templates ? To continue character input with the char-

acter bar A To change the input language B To finish character entry X To display themenu: press the touchpad.

Entering characters Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected.

32 Touchpad At

a gl an ce

X Use one finger to draw the desired charac- ter on the touch-sensitive surface. The character recognized is entered in the input line. You can draw the next character on the touch-sensitive surface.

If the character can be interpreted in different ways, these options are displayed. More information on the character sugges- tions (Y page 33).

Character suggestions

: Character recognized ; Character suggestions X To select a character suggestion: turn the controller. The selected character is entered instead of the automatically recognized character. Character entry can be continued.

Entering a space Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X Use your finger to touch the touch-sensi- tive surface and glide to the right. A space is entered into the input line.

Deleting characters Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X Use your finger to touch the touch-sensi- tive surface and glide to the left. The character last entered is deleted.

Switching input line

X Press the touchpad. A symbol is shown.

X To selectp: glide your finger to the left or right and press.

X To select the desired input line: glide up or down and press. The selected input line is active and char- acter entry can be continued.

Moving the cursor within the input line

X Press the touchpad. A symbol is shown.

X To selectp: glide your finger to the left or right and press.

X Tomove the cursor: glide to the left or right.

Changing the input language for hand- writing recognition Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected.

Touchpad 33

At a gl an ce

X Press the touchpad. A symbol is shown.

X To selectB: glide your finger to the left or right and press. The list of available input languages appears.

X To select a language: glide up or down and press. The input language for handwriting recog- nition has been changed.

Searching in lists The phone book search is used as an exam- ple. You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface. The first contact with the selected first character is highlighted in the phone book. Further information on handwriting recog- nition on the touchpad (Y page 32).

X Draw additional letters on the touchpad surface one after another.

X To complete the search and return to the phone book: press the touchpad.

Switching between the controller and the touchpad as input device Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X To switch from character entry using the controller to handwriting recogni- tion on the touchpad: use one finger to press the touchpad. Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is active.

X To switch fromhandwriting recognition on the touchpad to character entry using the controller: press the controller. Character entry using the controller is active.

Quick access for audio and telephone

Changing the station/music track

Depending on the audio source that is cur- rently activated, you can use this function to select the next station or music track. X Call up quick access (Y page 31). The current audio source is displayed.

X To select the previous or next station/ music track: glide to the right or left. The selected station/music track is played.

Changing the audio source

X Call up quick access (Y page 31). The current audio source is displayed.

X To display the available audio sources: glide down with one finger.

X To select an audio source: glide your finger to the left or right and press. The selected audio source is played.

34 Touchpad At

a gl an ce

Sending DTMF tones

The function is not supported by all mobile phones (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Call up quick access during a call (Y page 31).

X To select the desired characters: glide to the left or right respectively and press. Every character selected will be transmit- ted immediately.

Rear Seat Entertainment System

Media overview

You can access various types of media from all operating positions in the vehicle. The media can be connected to any jack or inserted into the various drives. RIf media from different sources are used, they can be used separately from each of the operating positions. Example: a film from the DVD drive is played on the rear right-hand operating position. This means that another film from the same DVD can-

not be played separately on the rear left- hand operating position. However, it is pos- sible to use the radio, memory card, MUSIC REGISTER, Media Interface, USB, online and Internet functions or AUX. RIf you use the same medium on both sides, you can both carry out the respective set- tings. The "last one wins" principle applies here, i.e. the last setting activated is favored. RThe Internet can be used separately at all operating positions. RThe Internet can only be used if it is set up and connected via a telephone (Y page 173).

You can select from the following media:

MEDIUM Function/location

AUX Devices that are connected to the AUX socket. The AUX socket is located under the center console arm- rest in the rear com- partment.

COMAND disc CDs or DVDs that are inserted into COMAND at the front of the vehicle.

COMAND memory card

Memory card inserted into COMAND in the front compartment.

COMAND Media Interface

Devices inserted into the USB ports at the front of the vehi- cle.

Disc CD or DVD inserted into the CD/DVD drive in the rear compartment.

Rear Seat Entertainment System 35

At a gl an ce

MEDIUM Function/location

Media Register Media found in the MEDIA REGISTER.

Media Interface 1 Media Interface 2

Devices connected to USB ports 1 and 2. USB ports 1 and 2 are located under the center console armrest in the rear compartment.

Bluetooth Audio Devices connected with COMAND via Bluetooth.

TV Television

Accessing media in the vehicle

X To show the menu: press the: button on the remote control.

X Using the:=; buttons on the remote control, select Devices. The discs/devices available are shown. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the device/disc using the:9 buttons and press the9button to confirm. If the device/disc contains music or video files, these will be played.

Further information onmedia in the rear com- partment (Y page 261).

Character entry (telephony)

Writing a textmessage is used as an example. Further information onwriting a textmessage (Y page 158).

Entering characters: X Turn and press the controller. The character selected in character bar; is entered into telephone number input line:.

Deleting characters: X To switch to the bottom line of the charac- ter bar: slideV the controller.

X To selectF: turn and press the controller. The character last entered is deleted.

Switching input line: X To switch to the bottom line of the charac- ter bar: slideV the controller.

X To select5: turn and press the controller. or X Slide ZV the controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears.

X To select an input line for the text of the text message: slideV and press the control- ler. The input line for the text of the text mes- sage is selected. The character bar has been adapted for entering text.

36 Character entry (telephony) At

a gl an ce

Entering characters: X Turn and press the controller. The character selected in character bar? is entered into text message input line=.

Deleting characters: X To switch to the bottom line of the charac- ter bar: slideV the controller.

X To selectF: turn and press the controller. The character last entered is deleted.

Deleting an entire entry: X To switch to the bottom line of the charac- ter bar: slideV the controller.

X To selectF: turn and hold the controller until the entire entry has been deleted.

Changing the country setting for the char- acter bar: X To switch to the bottom line of the charac- ter bar: slideV the controller.

X To selectB: turn and press the control- ler. The available languages are displayed.

X To select the language: turn and press the controller. The country setting for the character bar has been changed.

Further functions available in the charac- ter bar

Symbol Function

Switches between digits and symbols

* Switches the character bar to uppercase/lowercase letters

B Changes the country setting for the character bar

F Deletes a character/an entry

4,5 Selects the input line

2,3 Moves the cursor within the input line

Finishes an entry

& Cancels input

S Inserts a paragraph

Character entry (navigation)

Character entry options You can enter characters using the controller, or the telephone keypad or the touchpad, depending on the vehicle equipment.With the controller, you enter characters using a char- acter bar. By pressing the corresponding key one or more times, you can enter the charac- ters via the telephone keypad. To enter using the touchpad, draw the character in the entry field. COMAND supports this using a hand- writing recognition function.

Character entry (navigation) 37

At a gl an ce

Entering characters using the charac- ter bar

: Characters entered by the user STUT (orange)

; Characters automatically added by COMAND EBLL

= To switch to keyword search ? Characters not currently available A Currently selected character B Characters currently available C Character bar The example shows the address entry (Y page 84). X To select a character: turn and press the controller. Selected character: is entered in the upper line. COMAND adds the missing characters and shows the entry that best matches the current input. The characters are availableB or not?, depending on the characters already entered and the data stored in the digital map. TheG symbol indicates that an entry exists more than once. i Alternatively, depending on the vehicle equipment, you can enter characters using the telephone keypad or the touchpad.

X To delete a character: slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selecting F.

X To delete an entire entry: slide6 and turn the controller; then after selectingF

press and hold down the controller until the entire entry is deleted. i Alternatively, you can also delete the entry using the telephone keypad.

X To switch to keyword search: slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selecting= (Y page 87).

X To confirm an entry: slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after select- ing.

or X Slide5 the controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears. The location selection list appears. The selected entry is highlighted.

: Cursor ; Entry line The example shows the character entry when you save a destination as a navigable contact in the address book (Y page 85). X To select an input line: slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selecting 4 or5.

or X Slide5 the controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears.

X Turn and press the controller. X To move the cursor: select the input line. X Slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selecting2 or3.

38 Character entry (navigation) At

a gl an ce

X To change the character bar language: slide6 and turn the controller, then press it after selectingB. A menu appears.

X To select the language: turn and press the controller. The character set for the selected language is set.

The character bar entry functions are listed in the table.

Symbol Function

Switches between digits and symbols

* Switches the character bar to uppercase/lowercase letters

B Changes the character bar lan- guage

F Deletes a character/an entry

Switches to keyword search (Y page 87)

4,5 Selects the input line

2,3 Moves the cursor within the input line

Confirms an entry

& Cancels input

Character entry (navigation) 39

At a gl an ce

Entering characters using the telephone keypad If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone keypad, you can also use this to enter characters. X For example, to enter the letter I: press then number key briefly three times in suc- cession. As soon as you touch the number key, the number is highlighted in the additional display area. The character appears at the bottom of the display the first time the key is pressed and shows all the available characters. It switches to the next character each time the key is pressed.

X Wait until the character display goes out. The selected character is entered in the input line.

X To delete the character: press the$ button.

X To delete an entire entry: press and hold the$ button until the entire entry is deleted.

Entering characters using the touch- pad

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchpad, you can also use this to enter characters (Y page 30). Character entry is supported by a handwriting recognition function. An example is the address entry (Y page 84). X With one finger, draw the desired charac- ter, e.g. the letter B, on the touch-sensitive surface.

In the list (e.g. City), the first entry that starts with the letter entered is highlighted. You can draw the next character on the touch-sensi- tive surface. If the character that you have entered can be interpreted in different ways, these options are displayed. X To select a character suggestion: turn the controller. The selected character is used for the list display instead of the automatically recog- nized character. Character entry can be continued.

X To delete a character: touch the touch-sen- sitive surface with your finger and glide your finger to the left. The character last entered is deleted.

X To finish the entry and switch back to the list: press the touchpad.

40 Character entry (navigation) At

a gl an ce

Favorites

Overview of favorites

: To add a new favorite (Y page 41) ; To rename a selected favorite

(Y page 42) = To move a selected favorite

(Y page 42) ? To delete a selected favorite

(Y page 42) Displaying the favorites overview: X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

You can manage a total of 20 favorites. Further information on how to select and dis- play a favorite (Y page 41).

Displaying and selecting favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select a favorite: turn the controller. X To call up a favorite: press the controller.

Adding favorites

Adding predefined favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Assign New: turn and press the controller. The categories for the available favorites are displayed. RNavigation REntertainment RTel RVehicle RClimate Control

X To select a category: turn the controller and press to confirm. The corresponding favorites are displayed.

X To select the desired favorite: turn and press the controller.

X To store the favorite in the desired order: turn and press the controller. The favorite has been added. If a favorite is stored over another favorite, the favorite underneath is deleted.

Adding your own favorites You can store phone numbers from the phone book, radio stations or destinations as favor- ites. A phone number from the phone book is used as an example. X Call up the phone book (Y page 148). X Search for the contact and display the phone number: (Y page 148).

X To store the phone number as a favorite: press and hold the favorites button on the controller until the favorites are displayed.

X To store the favorite in the desired order: turn and press the controller. The favorite has been added. If a favorite is stored over another favorite, the favorite underneath is deleted.

Favorites 41

At a gl an ce

Renaming favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the favorite to be renamed: turn the controller.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Rename: turn and press the con- troller.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36) or the touchpad (Y page 32).

X To finish the entry: select OK. The favorite has been renamed.

Moving favorites

X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the favorite to be moved: turn the controller.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Move: turn and press the control- ler.

X To store the favorite in the desired order: turn and press the controller. The favorite has been moved. If a favorite is stored over another favorite, the favorite underneath is deleted.

Deleting favorites X Press the favorites button on the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the favorite to be deleted: turn the controller.

X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Delete: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The favorite is deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

42 Favorites At

a gl an ce

Your COMAND equipment .................. 44 Display settings .................................. 44 Time settings ....................................... 46 Text reader settings ............................ 48 Voice Control System settings .......... 48 WiFi ...................................................... 48 Bluetooth settings ............................ 51 Automatic volume adjustment .......... 51 Setting the system language ............. 52 Assigning a favorites button .............. 52 Importing/exporting data .................. 54 Reset function ..................................... 55

43

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Display settings

Setting the brightness The brightness detected by the display light sensor affects the setting options for this function.

X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Display: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select Brightness. A control appears.

X Select the desired brightness.

i The display brightness can be adjusted individually for the two COMAND displays at night using the controller.

Display design The COMAND display features optimized designs for operation during daytime and night-time hours. You can set the design by manually selecting day or night design or opt for an automatic setting. X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Display: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Auto. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Design Explanation

Day Mode The display is set perma- nently to day design.

Night Mode The display is set perma- nently to night design.

Auto If the Auto setting is selected, COMAND eval- uates the readings from the automatic vehicle light sensor and auto- matically switches between the display designs.

44 Display settings Sy st em

se tt in gs

Additional display area

The additional display area occupies the left-hand or right-hand third of the display. You can choose content information depending on the context. For instance, you can select an album cover in media mode or a permanent display, such as a small navigation map, in the additional area on the display. X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Display: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Additional Display Area. A menu appears.

X Select Context-dependent, Navigation Map, Entertainment Information, SIRIUS Weather, Consumption or Analog Clock. The # dot indicates the current setting. RContext-dependent The additional area shows one of the following depending on the context, e.g. album cover in media mode. RNavigation Map The navigation map is shown in the additional area. REntertainment Information Entertainment information is shown in the additional area, e.g. album cover, artist and track. RSIRIUS Weather SIRIUS weather information is shown in the additional area. RConsumption Consumption information is shown in the additional area. RAnalog Clock

Display settings 45

Sy st em

se tt in gs

A clock is shown in the additional area.

Time settings

General information COMAND can automatically set the time and date. The following navigation system functions require the time, time zone and summer/ standard time to be set correctly in order to work properly: Rroute guidance on routes with time- dependent traffic guidance Rcalculation of expected time of arrival

Switching automatic time on and off The Automatic Time Settings function is used to activate or deactivate the automatic setting of the time and date. This function is activated when the vehicle leaves the factory. X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Time: slide6, turn and press the controller to confirm. A menu appears.

X To select Automatic Time Settings: press the controller.

X To switch the function on O or off : press the controller.

Setting the time zone To set the time zone, the Automatic Time Settings function must be activated (Y page 46). X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Time: slide6, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Time Zone:: turn and press the controller. A list of countries appears. The # dot indi- cates the current setting.

X Select the country you are currently in by turning and pressing the controller. The country is accepted. A time zone list may also be displayed, depending on the country selected.

X To select the desired time zone: turn and press the controller. The time zone is accepted. A list of available options for setting summer time appears (Y page 46).

Setting summer and standard time You can use the Daylight Savings Time (Summer) menu to set automatic summer time changeover or switch the summer time setting on or off. The changeover to summer time advances the time by one hour. The Daylight Savings Time (Summer) menu or the Automatic option is not availa- ble in all countries. X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Time: slide6 the controller, turn and press to confirm. A menu appears.

X To select Daylight Savings Time (Summer): turn and press the controller. A list of available options for setting summer time appears.

X To select Auto, On or Off: turn and press the controller.

46 Time settings Sy st em

se tt in gs

Setting Function

Automatic The summer and standard time are automatically changed over.

On The clock is advanced one hour ahead of standard time.

Off The standard time for the chosen time zone is selected.

Manual time setting

Using the manual time settings, you can set the time forwards or backwards by up to sev- eral hours. X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Time: slide6 the controller, turn and press to confirm. A menu appears.

X To select Set Time Manually: turn and press the controller. A menu with an analog clock appears.

X To set the hour: turn the controller. X To highlight minutes: slide9 the con- troller.

X To set minutes: turn and press the control- ler. The time is accepted.

The Automatic Time Settings function is deactivated . If Automatic is set for the summer time changeover, a prompt will appear asking whether the automatic changeover should bemaintained between summer andwinter time. The Daylight Savings Time (Summer) menu or the Automatic option is not avail- able in all countries.

i If Automatic Time Settings is reacti- vated, the previous settings for time zone and summer time changeover are restored.

Setting the time and date format Use this function to set the time and date for- mat for all displays in the vehicle. X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Time: slide6 the controller, turn and press to confirm. A menu appears.

X To select Format: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select the desired date format: turn and press the controller. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X To select the desired time format: turn and press the controller. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Abbreviation Meaning

YYYY/MM/DD Year/Month/Day date format, year (all four digits)

YY/MM/DD Year/Month/Day date format, year (two digits)

MM/DD/YYYY Month/Day/Year date format, year (all four digits)

Time settings 47

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Abbreviation Meaning

DD/MM/YYYY Day/Month/Year date format, year (all four digits)

HH:MM (24 hrs) Hours : Minutes (24 hour time for- mat)

HH:MM (AM/PM) Hours : Minutes (AM/PM time for- mat)

Text reader settings

X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Text Reader Speed: turn and press the controller. A list appears.

X Select Fast, Medium or Slow. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Voice Control System settings

Opening/closing the help window The help window also shows you information on audible instructions: Rduring individualization Rduring subsequent operation of the Voice Control System.

X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller to confirm. A menu appears.

X To select Voice Control: turn and press the controller.

X Select Help Window. You have switched the help window on O or off .

More information on the Voice Control Sys- tem is available in the separate operating instructions.

Individualization Using individualization, you can fine-tune the Voice Control System to your own voice. This will help improve voice recognition (see the separate operating instructions).

WiFi

Overview Conditions: To establish a WiFi connection between COMAND and a WiFi-enabled device, such as a tablet computer or smartphone: RWiFi must be activated at COMAND and at the device to be connected.

If COMAND is to be used as a WiFi hotspot: RCOMAND must be connected to an Inter- net-enabled mobile phone via Bluetooth or USB. RThe Internet access data for the mobile phone network provider must be selected or set for COMAND. RThere must be an Internet connection to COMAND.

48 WiFi Sy st em

se tt in gs

Activating WiFi

X To select Vehicle from the main function bar: turn and press the controller.

X To switch to the menu bar: slideV the controller.

X Select System Settings. The system settings menu is shown.

X Select WiFi. The WiFi menu appears.

X Select Activate. X Press the controller. Switch the connection on O or off , depending on the previous setting.

Connecting the device

General notes

i The exactWiFi connection proceduremay vary depending on the device to be con- nected. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found on the operating instructions for the device you wish to connect.

Connecting a device via WPS PIN

Prerequisite: For this type of connection, the device to be connectedmust support "Connect usingWPS PIN". X To select Vehicle from the main function bar: turn and press the controller.

X To switch to the menu bar: slideV the controller.

X Select System Settings. The system settings menu is shown.

X Select WiFi. The WiFi menu appears.

X Select Connect Via WPS PIN. X Select the vehicle from the device to be connected and "Connect using WPS PIN". The vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB WLAN XXXXX. The device to be connected generates a PIN.

X This PIN is also entered on COMAND.

Connecting the device by pressing a button (push button)

WiFi 49

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Prerequisite: For this type of connection, the device to be connected must support "Connect via push button". X To select Vehicle from the main function bar: turn and press the controller.

X To switch to the menu bar: slideV the controller.

X Select System Settings. The System Settings menu is displayed.

X Select WiFi. The WiFi menu appears.

X Select Connect via WPS PBC. X Select the vehicle from the device to be connected and "Connect via WPS PBC". The vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB WLAN XXXXX.

X Select Continue in COMAND. Connecting the device via SSID and security key

Example display X To select Vehicle from the main function bar: turn and press the controller.

X To switch to the menu bar: slideV the controller.

X Select System Settings. The system settings menu is shown.

X Select WiFi. The WiFi menu appears.

X Select Connect Using Security Key. X Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB WLAN XXXXX.

X Enter the security key that appears on the COMAND display for the device to be con- nected.

X Confirm the entry.

Generating a new security key

Example display X To select Vehicle from the main function bar: turn and press the controller.

X To switch to the menu bar: slideV the controller.

X Select System Settings. The system settings menu appears.

X Select WiFi. The WiFi menu appears.

X Select Generate Security Key. X Select Regenerate. A new security key is generated.

X To save the security key: turn the controller and select Save. The WiFi menu appears. The new security key will now be displayed and verified when a connection is established via the security key. The connection must be re-estab- lished with the newly created security key.

i Device connections established using the previous security key will no longer work after the security key is changed. You have to reconnect these devices (Y page 49).

50 WiFi Sy st em

se tt in gs

Changing the name of the SSID

Example display X To select Vehicle from the main function bar: turn and press the controller.

X To switch to the menu bar: slideV the controller.

X Select System Settings. The system settings menu is shown.

X Select WiFi. The WiFi menu appears.

X Select Change SSID. A dialog for entering the SSID appears.

X Enter the new SSID. X Select . X Press the controller. From now on, when establishing a connec- tion, the vehicle will be shown with the new SSID both on the device to be connected and in the Connect Using Security Key menu.

i Device connections established using the previous SSID will no longer work after the SSID is changed. You have to reconnect these devices (Y page 49).

Bluetooth settings

General information about Blue- tooth

Bluetooth-capable devices, e.g. mobile phones, have to comply with a certain profile in order to be connected to COMAND. Every

Bluetooth device has its own specific Blue- tooth name. Bluetooth technology is a standard for short-rangewireless data transmissions up to approximately 10 meters. You can use Blue- tooth to connect your mobile phone to COMAND to, for example: Ruse the hands-free system Restablish an Internet connection Rlisten to music using Bluetooth Audio Rexchange vCards Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth

X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Activate Bluetooth: turn and press the controller. This switches Bluetooth on O or off .

Automatic volume adjustment

General information With the Automatic Volume Adjustment function, the volumes of different audio sour- ces are adjusted for each other, to compen- sate for relative differences in volume. For example: changing from a relatively quiet to a relatively loud radio station. The volume for both stations sounds the same. Manual readjustment of the volume is not required. The Automatic Volume Adjustment func- tion is deactivatedwhen the vehicle leaves the factory. Using this function, the dynamic range of the music is slightly reduced. To make the most of the audiophile sound qual- ity, it is recommended to leave it off.

Automatic volume adjustment 51

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Switching automatic volume adjust- ment on and off X Press the button or X Press Vehicle in the main function bar. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Automatic Volume Adjust ment: turn and press the controller. Switch the function Automatic Volume Adjustment on O or off .

Setting the system language

This function allows you to determine the lan- guage for the menu displays and the naviga- tionmessages. The selected language affects the characters available for entry.

i The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announce- ments will be in English.

i When you set the system language, the language of the Voice Control System will change accordingly. If it is not supported by the Voice Control System, English will be selected.

X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Language: turn and press the controller. The list of languages appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the desired language. COMAND loads the selected language and sets it.

Assigning a favorites button

Vehicles equipped with a touchpad You can call up the favorites function via the Favorite Functions function in the system menu or via the favorites button on the touch- pad. To call up the Favorites function via the system menu: X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Favorite Functions: press the controller. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the desired function, e.g. Phone book: turn and press the controller.

To call up the Favorites function via the touchpad: X Press the favorites button on the touchpad. The favorites are displayed.

X To select the desired function, e.g. Phone book: turn and press the controller.

The Favorites function can be exited at any time. To exit the Favorites function: RPress the Favorites button again RPress the% button on the controller RSelect the% button in the display Further information on favorites (Y page 41).

Vehicles equipped with a telephone keypad You can display the favorites by pressing the g button on the telephone keypad. You can edit the favorites via the Favorite Functions function in the system menu.

52 Assigning a favorites button Sy st em

se tt in gs

X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Favorite Functions: press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Assign Function: press the controller. The list of predefined functions appears.

X To select the desired function, e.g. Enter tainment: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select the desired function, e.g. Play More Like This. A menu appears with the prompt Please select a favorites button:.

X To select the desired button, e.g.m: turn and press the controller. A message appears stating that the button has been assigned the selected function. i For certain functions, e.g. Assign Chan nel/Station or Media Source, a mes- sage appears. This explains how you can save the desired station/channel directly from the respective function menu in three steps.

Overview of all current favorites: X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Favorite Functions: press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Overview of Current Favor ites. An overview of all the current favorites appears.

To change the alias: X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Favorite Functions: press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Change Alias. A menu appears with the prompt Please select a favorites button:.

X To select the desired favorite, e.g.n: turn and press the controller.

X Enter the desired alias and selectb. The alias is changed. i Up to six characters are available for the alias. An entry with fewer characters is also possible.

To call up a favorite: X Press theg button. You call up the favorites functions menu. Theg symbol lights up.

X Press a favorites button, e.g.n. This calls up the predefined function.

X To exit the favorites function menu: press theg button. The favorite functions menu is closed. i If you have pressed theg button and do not press any other buttons, the favor- ites functions menu is exited automatically after 16 seconds.

You can select the following predefined func- tions in a menu, for example: RSpoken Driving Recomm. On/Off: to switch the current driving recommenda- tions on/off. RSound Menu: to call up the sound settings. RFrom Mercedes-Benz Apps: to call up apps for online and Internet functions.

Assigning a favorites button 53

Sy st em

se tt in gs

To reset favorite(s): X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Favorite Functions: press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Reset Favorite(s). A menu appears with the prompt Please select a favorites button:.

X Select the desired favorites, e.g.p or Reset All. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to reset.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the favorite is reset to its pre-installed favorite function. If you select No the process is canceled. i You can also assign the Favorites button directly from a relevant function, such as in the radio menu (Y page 201).

Importing/exporting data

General notes ! Never remove the stick or card when writ- ing data to the USB stick or the memory card. You may otherwise lose data.

Using this function, you can do the following with your personal COMAND data: Rtransfer from one system/vehicle to another. Rmake a backup copy (export data) and load it again (import data). Rprotect your data from unwanted export by activating a PIN prompt (presetting: deac- tivated ).

You can either use an SD memory card or a USB storage device (e.g. a USB stick) as tem- porary storage.

Activating/deactivating PIN protec- tion

X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Data Import/Export: turn and press the controller.

X Select Activate PIN Protection. Activate O or deactivate PIN protec- tion. When activating PIN protection, you will be prompted to enter a PIN.

X To enter the 4-digit PIN and select : turn and press the controller. You will be prompted to enter the PIN again.

X Enter the PIN again and select . The PIN prompt nowprotects your personal data from unwanted export.

i If you deactivate your PIN protection, you will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If you have forgotten your PIN, an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate your

54 Importing/exporting data Sy st em

se tt in gs

PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you can deactivate PIN protection by resetting your personal COMAND data (Y page 55).

Importing/exporting data

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 215). or X Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory stick) (Y page 215).

X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select System Settings: slideV and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Data Import/Export: turn and press the controller.

X Select Import Data or Export Data. i If you import data such as address data, the existing data on COMAND is overwrit- ten. You will see a message to this effect. COMAND is restarted after the data import.

If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt appears when you select Export Data. X To enter the PIN: turn the controller and press . PIN protection is deactivated.

X To select Memory Card, USB 1 or USB 2: turn and press the controller. This function exports all the data to the selected disc. A window appears with the message that the data has been exported.

You can export address data, bookmarks, system settings that you havemade and radio station lists, for example. Personal music files in the MEDIA REGISTER cannot be saved and imported again using this function. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.

Reset function

You can completely reset COMAND to the factory settings. Amongst other things, this will delete all personal COMAND data. This includes the station presets, entries in the destinationmemory and in the list of previous destinations in the navigation system and address book entries. In addition, an acti- vated PIN protection, which you have used to protect your data against unwanted export, will be deactivated. Resetting is recom- mended before selling or transferring owner- ship of your vehicle, for example. Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music files in the MEDIA REGISTER, will be deleted. You can also delete music files from the MEDIA REGISTER using the "Delete all media files" function (Y page 226). Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data. X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

Reset function 55

Sy st em

se tt in gs

X To select System Settings: slideV, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Reset: turn and press the con- troller. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to reset.

X Select Yes or No. If you select No the process is canceled. If you select Yes a prompt will appear again asking whether you really wish to reset.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes a message will be shown. COMAND is reset to the factory settings and restarted. If you select No the process is canceled.

56 Reset function Sy st em

se tt in gs

Your COMAND equipment .................. 58 Vehicle settings .................................. 58 Seats .................................................... 63 Climate control settings ..................... 66 Child-proof locks ................................. 72 360 camera ....................................... 72 Rear view camera ............................... 73

57

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicle settings

Calling up vehicle settings

X Press the button on the controller. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Vehicle Settings: turn the con- troller and press to confirm. The menu for the vehicle settings is active.

X To select the desired vehicle setting: turn and press the controller. The main area with the setting element is active.

Selecting a different vehicle setting: X To activate the menu for selecting the vehi- cle setting: slideVZ the controller.

Exiting the vehicle settings: X To select&: slideV and press the controller.

Ambient lighting

General notes You can set the following for the ambient lighting: RZone The zone setting determines the area in which the brightness setting is to be applied. If the Complete zone is selected for longer than 0.5 seconds, the brightness of the Front zone is adopted for the entire vehicle. RBrightness This setting makes an additional change to the brightness of the ambient lighting. The brightness change is only effective for the selected zone. For this reason, the zone for which the brightness change is to be active must be selected first. RColor This setting changes the color of the ambi- ent lighting.

Setting the brightness of the zones

X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Ambient Light: Brightness: turn and press the controller. The left-hand setting element is active. The brightness value for the currently selected zone is displayed.

X Press the controller.

58 Vehicle settings Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

X To change the brightness value: turn and press the controller.

X To select a zone: slideVY and turn the controller.

You can find further information in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Setting the color

i Once a color is set, it is used for all zones. The brightness of the color used can be set separately for each zone.

X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Ambient Light: Color: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To select a color: turn the controller. You can find further information in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Switching the display lighting on/off This display lighting adjustment function is only available if the vehicle is not equipped with the "Ambient lighting" package. X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Ambient Light: Display: turn the controller and press to confirm. The function switches on or off, depending on the previous setting.

i The brightness can be changed using the control between the two displays.

You can find further information on the inter- ior lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Setting the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can make the following settings for the EASY- ENTRY/EXIT feature: RSteering Column RSteering Column and Seat ROff X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Easy Entry/Exit: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To change the setting: turn the controller. When you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- ture, the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is also activated. You can find further information on the crash- responsive EASY-EXIT feature in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Activating/deactivating the panel heating

Vehicle settings 59

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

The panel heating function warms the surfa- ces with which the vehicle occupants fre- quently come into contact. Activation of the panel heating using COMAND as described below only works if seat heating is activated (see the vehicle Operator's Manual). X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Panel Heating: turn and press the controller.

X To change the setting: turn the controller.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation

You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Acoustic Lock Feedback: turn and press the controller. The function switches on or off, depending on the previous setting.

You can find further information on the lock- ing feature in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Activating/deactivating the seat-belt adjustment function

The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Belt Adjustment: turn and press the controller. The function switches on or off, depending on the previous setting.

You can find further information in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Activating/deactivating the auto- matic folding mirror function

When the Automatic Mirror Folding func- tion is activated, the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. The exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

60 Vehicle settings Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Automatic Mirror Folding: turn and press the controller. The function switches on or off, depending on the previous setting.

You can find further information in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Switching locator lighting on/off If you switch on the Locator Lighting func- tion, the exterior lighting is switched on for a short time when it is dark. The light switch must be set to. The exterior lighting remains on for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the engine, the locator light- ing is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated. You can find further information on the auto- matic headlamp mode in the vehicle Opera- tor's Manual.

Switching the locator lighting on/off X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Locator Lighting: turn and press the controller. The function switches on or off, depending on the previous setting.

You can find further information in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Switching the automatic locking fea- ture on/off

When the automatic locking feature is acti- vated, the vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the vehi- cle is traveling faster than walking pace. X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Automatic Locking: turn and press the controller. The function switches on or off, depending on the previous setting.

You can find further information in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Setting the delayed switch-off time

Interior lighting delayed switch-off

The interior lighting is activated for the dura- tion of the delayed switch-off time when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock.

Vehicle settings 61

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Interior Lighting Delayed Switch-off: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To change the delayed switch-off time: turn the controller.

You can find further information in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Exterior lighting delayed switch-off If you switch on the Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off function, the exterior lighting is switched on for a short time after the engine is switched off. The light switch must be set to. The exterior lighting lights up for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the tailgate, the exterior light- ing switches off after the set time.

X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Exterior Lighting Delayed Switch-off: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To change the delayed switch-off time: turn the controller.

Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while the tow-away alarm is armed. This can occur if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Tow-away Alarm: turn and press the controller. The function switches on or off, depending on the previous setting.

Arming/disarming the interior motion sensor

When the interior motion sensor is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if move- ment is detected in the vehicle interior. This can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior without authorization, for example.

62 Vehicle settings Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Interior Motion Sensor: turn and press the controller. The function switches on or off, depending on the previous setting.

Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction

Activating the Trunk Opening-height Restriction function allows you to avoid bumping the trunk lid on a low garage ceiling, for example. X Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 58). X To select Trunk Opening-height Restriction: turn and press the control- ler. The function switches on or off, depending on the previous setting.

Seats

Overview Using theT button next to the controller or the seat settings menu item in the vehicle menu, you can call up the following adjust- ment functions: RBackrest side bolsters RLumbar RShoulder area RMassage RDynamics RSeat heating balance

i You also can save and call up the current settings of a seat function using the mem- ory button and the corresponding memory position switch (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).

Selecting the adjustment function and seat

X Press theT button. The seat settings menu is shown.

or X To select Vehicle from the main function bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Seat Settings in themenu: turn and press the controller. The menu for selecting seat functions is activated.

X To select the required seat function: turn and press the controller.

X To switch between Driver and Front Passenger: slide XVY the controller.

Seats 63

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Adjustment functions

Adjusting the backrest side bolsters

X Call up the seat functions (Y page 63). X To select Backrest Sides: turn and press the controller.

X To select the seat: slide XVY the control- ler.

X To change the setting: turn the controller. You will see the changes you have made in the settings display.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Adjusting the seat contour in the lum- bar region of the seat backrest

This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the lumbar region of the backrest (4-way lumbar support). X Call up the seat functions (Y page 63). X To select Lumbar: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select the seat: slide XVY the control- ler.

X To activate the setting element: press the controller.

X To change the setting: slide ZV or XVY the controller. The change will be visible in the setting ele- ment.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Adjusting the shoulder area

X Call up the seat functions (Y page 63). X To select Shoulders: turn and press the controller.

X To select the seat: slide XVY the control- ler.

X To change the setting: turn the controller. You will see the changes you have made in the settings display.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Adjusting the driving dynamics

X Call up the seat functions (Y page 63). X To select the seat: slide XVY the control- ler.

64 Seats Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

X To select Dynamic Multicontour Seat: turn and press the controller.

You can select: R0: Off R1: Level 1 (weak) R2: Level 2 (strong) X To select the setting: turn the controller. X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Seat heating balance

The balance function controls the distribution of heat on the seat backrest and cushion. The balance function influences the currently set heating level of the seat heating (see the vehicle Operator's Manual). X Call up the seat functions (Y page 63). X To select Seat Heating Balance: turn and press the controller.

X To select the seat: slide XVY the control- ler.

X To change the setting: turn the controller. You will see the changes you have made in the settings display.

The settings represent the following: R0 the backrest and seat cushion are evenly heated according to the setting selected with the seat heating button. R1 to 3 the heat output to the seat cushion is reduced one level at a time. R-1 to -3 the heat output to the backrest is reduced one level at a time.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Massage programs

Overview You can select the following massage pro- grams: RHot Relaxing Massage, Back Relaxing massage program starting in the pelvic area, warm pressure points can be felt, full back massage, stretching the pel- vic area, ending with gentle soothingmove- ments RHot Relaxing Massage, Shoulders Relaxing massage program starting in the pelvic area, warm pressure points can be felt, full back massage, stretching the pel- vic area, ending with gentle soothingmove- ments RActivating Massage Activating massage through increasing twin-waves and then soothing movements RClassic Massage Massage with increasing waves, soothing movements RMobilizing Massage Mobilization of the spinal column and the complete upper body bymeans of pressure point mobilizing massage at chest height RActive Workout The Active Workout program requires your active participation. It is suitable for train- ing your stomach muscles during a traffic jam, for example, by means of targeted tensing and relaxing. You can use the pro- gram to be sporty in the vehicle.

Seats 65

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

As soon as you feel a pressure point in the backrest cushion, this indicates that you should press against this point. - As soon as you feel pressure on your back, press against it.

- Keep the pressure under your feet even. Do not wedge yourself against the ped- als.

- You will feel how your stomach muscles tense.

- Continue to breathe normally, do not hold your breath.

- When the pressure in the backrest cush- ion stops, stop pressing against it and relax briefly.

Selecting a massage program

X Call up the seat functions (Y page 63). X To select Massage: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select the seat: slide XVY the control- ler.

X To select a massage program (1 to 6): turn and press the controller. The massage program runs for approx- imately 15 to 25minutes, depending on the setting.

X To change the massage intensity: turn the controller to: and press to confirm. The intensity changes between gentle and vigorous each time the controller is pressed.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Resetting all adjustments

X Call up the seat functions (Y page 63). X Select a seat (Y page 63). X To select Reset: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select the seat: slide XVY the control- ler.

X To reset: press the controller. A prompt appears.

X To select Yes or No: turn and press the con- troller. If you select No the process is canceled. After selecting Yes all seat adjustments are reset to the default values (factory setting).

Climate control settings

Overview You have the following options for adjusting climate control settings: Rusing the climate control bar Rusing the climate control menu You can set the most important climate control functions such as temperature, air- flow and air distribution using the climate control bar. The climate control bar is visible in most displays. You can find all the climate control functions in the climate control menu. You can use the climate control bar (Y page 67) to switch to the climate control menu.

66 Climate control settings Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Settings in the climate control bar

Overview You can set the most important climate control functions directly in the climate control bar and change them in the climate control menu.

: Adjusts temperature, airflow and air dis- tribution, left, as well as displaying the current setting

; Calls up the climate control menu and dis- plays the current cooling and airflow set- ting

= Adjusts temperature, airflow and air dis- tribution, right, as well as displaying the current setting

To switch to the climate control bar: X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6, release, then slide6 again, turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

Calling up the climate control bar X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until the climate control bar is activated.

Setting the temperature

X Call up the climate control bar (Y page 67)

X To select the current temperature on the left or right: turn and press the controller. The temperature setting scale appears.

X To change the setting: turn the controller.

i You can also use the climate controlmenu (Y page 68) to set the temperature.

Setting the airflow

X Call up the climate control bar. (Y page 67)

X To selectJ on the left or right: turn and press the controller. The airflow setting scale appears.

X To change the setting: turn the controller.

i You can also use the climate controlmenu (Y page 68) to set the airflow.

Climate control settings 67

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Setting the air distribution

X Call up the climate control bar (Y page 67)

X To select the current air distribution display on the left or right, e.g.O: turn and press the controller. The air distribution setting scale appears.

X To change the setting: turn the controller.

i You can also use the climate controlmenu (Y page 67) to set the air distribution.

Settings in the climate menu

Overview In the climate control menu there are settings available in the bottom bar and themain area.

Calling up the climate control menu

X Switch to the climate control bar (Y page 67).

X To select from climate control bar;: turn and press the controller. The menu for selecting climate control functions is activated.

X To select the desired climate control func- tion: turn and press the controller. The selected climate control function appears.

Switching climate control on/off

This setting is made in the bottom bar of the climate control menu. X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To switch to the footer: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select O Climate Ctrl On: turn and press the controller.

The climate control is switched on O or off depending on the settings. If the climate control is switched off: Rthe climate control setting functions are deactivated. Rthe blower is switched off. Rthe air recirculation flaps are closed.

Switching cooling with air dehumidifi- cation on/off This setting is made in the bottom bar of the climate control menu.

68 Climate control settings Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

i Activating the cooling with air dehumidi- fication facilitates the cooling of the vehicle interior even with high outside tempera- tures.

X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To switch to the footer: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select A/C: turn and press the controller. X Switch cooling with air dehumidification on

O or off .

i The current status of the cooling function is displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON activated, A/C OFF deactivated (Y page 67).

i Deactivating the cooling with air dehu- midification function reduces fuel con- sumption.

Synchronizing the climate control set- tings This setting is made in the bottom bar of the climate control menu. With the O Sync (synchronization) option, you can decide whether you wish to activate the climate control settings for all zones together or separately. X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To switch to the footer: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select O Sync: turn and press the con- troller.

X Switch the synchronization function on O or off .

With the synchronization function switched off, you can alternate between driver and front passenger. X To switch from the footer to the main area: slide5 the controller.

X To switch between left and right: slide 1 the controller. Not all climate control functions allow switching between the driver and front passenger.

Further information (see the vehicle Opera- tor's Manual).

Rear-compartment air conditioning set- tings This setting is made in the bottom bar of the climate control menu. You can also set the rear-compartment air conditioning from the front. X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To switch to the footer: slideV the con- troller.

X To select Rear Setting: turn and press the controller. Activate the rear-compartment climate control settings. The vehicle interior dis- play changes accordingly.

X To switch the setting back to the front again: select Return to Front. After a short time, COMAND automatically switches the adjustment functions back to the front.

Climate control settings 69

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Adjusting the footwell temperature

This setting is made in the main area of the climate control menu. X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To select Adjust Footwell: turn and press the controller.

X If necessary, change sides: slide XVY the controller.

X To change the setting: turn and press the controller.

Exiting a menu X Press the% button.

Adjusting the climate mode settings

This setting is made in the main area of the climate control menu. By setting the climate mode you determine the type of airflow. The setting is only active when the air-conditioning system is set to (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).

X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To select Climate Mode: turn and press the controller.

X If necessary, change sides: slide1 the controller.

X To change the setting: turn the controller.

Exiting a menu X Press the% button. The current airflow setting is shown in the cli- mate control bar: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS (Y page 67).

Starting/stopping the perfume atom- izer

This setting is made in the main area of the climate control menu. The perfume atomizer makes it possible to scent the air in individual compartments in the vehicle interior. Further information on the perfume atomizer (see the vehicle Oper- ator's Manual). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To select Air Freshener: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press the controller.

X To set the intensity: turn the controller when the atomizer is switched on.

Exiting a menu X Press the% button.

70 Climate control settings Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Switching the ionization on/off

This setting is made in the main area of the climate control menu. The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in the vehicle interior. Further information (see the vehicle Operator's Manual). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To select Ionization: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To switch the ionization on/off: press the controller.

Exiting a menu X Press the% button.

Auxiliary heating

This setting is made in the main area of the climate control menu. You can pre-set three departure times for automatic activation of the auxiliary heating.

Selecting the pre-set time: X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To select Auxiliary Heating: turn and press the controller.

X Turn the controller.

Changing the pre-set time: X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 68).

X To select Auxiliary Heating: turn and press the controller.

X To select the departure time that will be changed: turn and press the controller. A menu for changing the time opens.

X To select the required setting element (ana- log clock, hours or minutes): slide5 and 9 the controller.

X To change the setting: turn the controller. X To exit the menu: press the controller.

Climate control settings 71

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Child-proof locks

Switching the rear compartment dis- plays on/off

This function serves to switch the rear-com- partment displays on/off. X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Parental Control: turn and press the controller. The menu to select the side in the rear compartment is activated.

X Select Rear Left or Rear Right. X To switch Display on/off: turn the con- troller.

Exiting the vehicle settings: X To select&: slideV and press the controller.

Locking/unlocking rear compart- ment displays This function serves to lock/unlock the rear- compartment displays. X Press the button. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select Parental Control: turn and press the controller. The menu to select the side in the rear compartment is activated.

X Select Rear Left or Rear Right. X To select Lock to lock/unlock the rear compartment displays: slideVY and press the controller. The display is locked, a correspondingmes- sage with& appears on the screen. Unlock appears in the display.

Exiting the vehicle settings: X To select&: slideV and press the controller.

i The volume can still be adjusted if you have locked the rear compartment display. It can also be switched on/off using the integrated switch.

360 camera

Important notes The 360 camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your imme- diate surroundings. You are always responsi- ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that no persons or animals are in the maneuvering range.

Overview The 360 camera surveys the vehicle sur- roundings and assists you, for example when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. For further information on the 360 camera, see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.

Settings for the 360 camera When you activate the Activation by R gear function, the image from the 360 cam- era is displayedwhen you select reverse gear. Activating/deactivating using the reverse gear: X Press the button in the center con- sole. The vehicle menu is displayed.

72 360 camera Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller.

X Select 360 Camera. X Select Activation by R gear. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

Displaying the 360 camera image The 360 camera image can be displayed if: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360 cam- era RCOMAND is switched on (Y page 25) Rthe 360 Camera function is switched on Displaying the image of the 360 camera: X Press the button in the center con- sole. A menu appears.

X Select 360 Camera. The 360 camera image appears in split- screen mode.

Youwill see the previous view on the display if you have switched the function on: Rand turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock Rselect transmission position P Rthe vehicle exceeds a speed of approx. 30 km/h

Manually switching the display X To select&: slide6 and press the con- troller.

Automatically switching the display: X You can automatically switch the 360 cam- era display using reverse gear (Y page 72).

Opening the camera cover for clean- ing X To select Open Camera Cover in the 360 cameramenu: turn the controller and press to confirm. The Please Wait...message appears for approximately three seconds. The camera cover opens.

The camera cover closes automatically if: Rthe ignition is switched off. Rthe vehicle exceeds a speed of approx. 30 km/h

Rear view camera

Important notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your imme- diate surroundings. You are always responsi- ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking,make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

Overview The rear view camera covers the immediate surroundings of the vehicle and assists you when parking. You can find further information about the rear view camera in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Settings for the rear view camera When you activate the Activation by R gear function, the image from the rear view camera is displayed when you select reverse gear.

Rear view camera 73

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Activating/deactivating using the reverse gear: X Press the button in the center con- sole. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller. X To select System Settings: turn and press the controller.

X Select Rear View Camera. The Rear View Camera menu appears.

X Select Activation by R gear. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status. When you start the vehicle and engage reverse gear, the camera cover opens auto- matically if the function is activated. The area behind the vehicle is shownwith guide lines in the display (see the vehicle Opera- tor's Manual).

Object detection The rear view camera can detect moving and stationary objects. If, for example, a pedes- trian or another vehicle is detected, these objects are marked with bars. The system is only able to detect and mark stationary objects when your vehicle is moving. By con- trast, stationary objects will always be detected and marked. Switching object detection on/off X To select Object Detection in the rear view camera menu: turn and press the con- troller. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

Opening the camera cover for clean- ing X To select Open Camera Cover in the rear view camera menu: turn and press the con- troller. The Please Wait...message appears for approximately three seconds. The camera cover opens.

The camera cover closes automatically if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe vehicle pulls away

74 Rear view camera Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Your COMAND equipment .................. 76 Introduction ......................................... 76 Basic settings ...................................... 80 Destination input ................................ 83 Personal POIs and routes ................... 97 Route guidance ................................. 101 Real-time traffic reports ................... 113 Storing destinations ......................... 117 Map functions ................................... 120 Navigation functions ........................ 130 Problems with the navigation sys- tem ..................................................... 132

75

Na vi ga tio

n

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Introduction

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND. COMAND calculates the route to the destina- tion without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stopping zone Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges

COMAND can give incorrect navigation com- mands if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes in an area. For example, a routemay have been diverted or the direction of a one- way street may have changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg- ulations always have priority over the sys- tem's driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of con- sulting the map display for directions. Look- ing at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident.

General notes

Operational readiness of the navigation system The navigation system must determine the position of the vehicle before first use or whenever operational status is restored. Therefore, you may have to drive for a while before precise route guidance is possible.

GPS reception Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation systemdepends onGPS recep- tion. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tun- nels or parking garages.

i Using roof carriers may impair the correct functioning of a roof antenna (phone, sat- ellite radio, GPS).

76 Introduction Na

vi ga tio

n

Entry restriction In certain countries, data entry is restricted if the vehicle is traveling at more than approx- imately 3 mph (5 km/h). The restriction is deactivated as soon as the vehicle speed drops below about 2 mph (3 km/h). When the restriction is active, certain entries cannot be made. This will be indicated by the fact that certain menu items are grayed out and cannot be selected. The following entries are not possible, for example: Rentering the destination city and street Rentering a destination via the map Rentering POIs in the vicinity of a city or via a name search Rediting entries Rdirect entry via the telephone keypad (if available)

Other entries are possible, such as entering points of interest in the vicinity of the desti- nation or current position.

Introduction 77

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Switching to navigation mode

X Press the button. The map shows the vehicle's current position.

Additional activation option: X To activate the menu: slide5 the controller (e.g. in radio mode). X To select Navi: turn and press the controller. Access within navigation: X From any menu, press the button. The navigation menu appears.

X Press the controller. The map shows the vehicle's current position.

Showing/hiding the menu

Using the menu, you can make a destination entry or select the navigation settings, for exam- ple.

78 Introduction Na

vi ga tio

n

X To show: slide6 the controller when the map appears in full screen mode. or X Glide down the touchpad with one finger. Route guidance is not active: Destination is highlighted. Route guidance is active:y is highlighted. Route guidance inactive: no destination has been entered yet and no route has been cal- culated. Route guidance is active: the destination has been entered, the route has been calculated. The display shows the route, changes of direction and lane recommendations. Navigation announcements guide you to your destination.

X To hide: press the% button. or X Slide5 the controller. Full screen symbol: appears.

X Press the controller.

Moving the map

Introduction 79

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the menu is faded out (Y page 78). X Press the controller. The crosshair is shown.

X Slide1,4 or2 the controller. The map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair.

X To select a destination on the map: press the controller. If navigable destinations are available, they will be displayed in a list.

X Turn and press the controller. X To show the menu: press the controller. X Select Menu.

Basic settings

Setting route type and route options

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Route Settings. X Select a route type. A filled circle indicates the current selec- tion. RActive route guidance: COMAND calcu- lates a new route. RInactive route guidance: COMAND uses the selection as the new setting.

i Route guidance active: a destination has been entered and the route has been cal- culated.

Route guidance inactive: no destination has been entered yet and no route has been calculated yet.

Fast Route

COMAND calculates a route with a short journey time.

Dynamic Traffic Route

Based on the Fast Route route type and includes traf- fic reports on the route for the route guidance. You can receive real-time traffic reports via satellite radio (Y page 113).

Eco Route COMAND calculates an economical route. The jour- ney may take slightly longer compared to taking the fast route.

Short Route

COMAND calculates a shorter route.

X To calculate alternative routes: select Calculate Alternative Routes. Switch the function on O or off . Function activated: after each route calcu- lation, route alternatives are offered that correspond to the local conditions (Y page 110). If desired, you can have COMAND calculate alternative routes even during route guid- ance (Y page 110).

80 Basic settings Na

vi ga tio

n

X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid Options. A menu appears.

X Select one of the options. O: using or avoiding route options is ena- bled : using or avoiding route options is disa- bled RAvoid Area (Y page 127) COMAND enables you to avoid areas you do not wish to drive through. RAvoid Highways RAvoid Ferries RAvoid Auto Trains RAvoid Tunnels RAvoid Unpaved Roads The function is not available in all countries. RUse Toll Roads RUse Carpool Lanes If your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes, you can use this function. Navigation includes carpool lanes if the car- pool lanes option is activated.

Depending on local conditions, COMAND may not always be able to include all route options. A route may include a ferry, for instance, even though Avoid Ferries is ena- bled. COMAND will notify you of this visually as well as through a navigation message. To avoid toll roads: the route calculation excludes routes which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). X To exit amenu: slide1 the controller.

X To use toll roads: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select an option. The options include using roads that require cash payment or electronic billing, or switching off the function.

Selecting announcements

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Settings. A menu appears.

X Select an option. Switch the option on O or off .

Basic settings 81

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Announce Street Names

COMAND announces the names of the streets to which the impending change of direction will lead. The function is not available in all countries.

Audio Fadeout

The volume of an active media source is automati- cally reduced during a navi- gation announcement.

Gas on Reserve

Function activated: once the reserve fuel tank level is reached, a message appears in COMAND to help you start the search for a gas station.

Atten tion Assist

Function activated: if ATTEN- TION ASSIST displays a warn- ing in the multifunction dis- play, a message appears in COMAND to help you start the search for a rest stop. If a route contains highways, a rest stop search is started in the vicinity. The map is shown with the message Searching For a Rest Area in the Vicinity. If service stations are found, the nearest service station is highlighted on the map. Further information about ATTENTION ASSIST can be found in the vehicle Opera- tor's Manual.

Using car pool lanes You can include carpool lanes (HOV or car sharing lanes) in the route calculation. If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please observe the applicable laws as well as the local and time limitation conditions. Carpool lanesmay only be used under certain conditions. They can normally be used when

there are two people in the vehicle. However, there are also carpool laneswhich can only be used when there are three or more people in the vehicle. In California, lone drivers can use a carpool lane if their vehicle's emission level or fuel consumption is below a fixed thresh- old. Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific times (e.g. during the peak period). Carpool lanes are indicated by a diamond symbol on specific road signs and on the road surface. The road signs may also include the designation CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged as a separate lane next to the others or are built as a physically separate lane. Depending on the setting under Use Car pool Lanes, COMAND uses carpool lanes when calculating the route. COMAND then guides you in and out of carpool lanes using visual and acoustic driving directions. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Route Settings. X Select Avoid Options. X Select Use Carpool Lanes. Carpool lanes will either be used O or avoided when calculating the route.

82 Basic settings Na

vi ga tio

n

Destination input

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND.

i Destination entry may be blocked while driving, depending on the country specifications.

As an address

Calling up the address entry menu

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller. X Select Address Entry. Address entry options You can enter the address, e.g as: Rcity/ZIP code, street, house number Rcity/ZIP code, street Rcity/ZIP code, center Rcity/ZIP code, street, intersection

Rstreet, city/ZIP code, house number Rstreet, city/ZIP code, intersection

i Entering the street before the city is use- ful if the address has an unusual street name.

Destination input 83

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

While entering an address, you can also switch to other destination entry options: RKeyword search (Y page 87) RMap (Y page 93) RPoint of interest (Y page 89)

Entering the address

The example shows how to enter an address, e.g. for your home address. X In the address entry menu, select Street: press the controller (Y page 83).

X Enter BROADWAY. Character entry (Y page 37).

Calling up a list X Slide5 the controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears.

or X To select OK: turn and press the controller.

X To select Town: press the controller. X Enter the city, e.g. New York. Then call up the list and select an entry. Proceed in the same way as when entering a street.

X To select No.: press the controller. X Enter the house number. Then call up the list and select an entry. Proceed in the same way as when entering a street. The address entry menu shows the address. The adjacent map section shows the destination.

The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top of the list of cities. When destinations are entered using the character bar, the locations for which route guidance has already been carried out are more prominently available. You can enter any of the cities, streets, zip codes, etc. which are stored in the digital map. However, zip codes are not available for some countries. State/province and city are sufficient to start navigating. You can enter either a city or a zip code. The street and house number complete the destination address.

Entering additional address data You can enter additional address data: RState/Province You can use Last Used to select the last selected state (USA) or province (Canada). You can also select Mexico and The Baha- mas. RZIP Code

84 Destination input Na

vi ga tio

n

Entering a ZIP code will delete a previously entered city. RCenter Entering a center will delete a previously entered street. RIntersection Entering an intersection will delete a previ- ously entered house number.

X Select the address entry menu (Y page 83). X To select State/Province, ZIP Code, Ctr. or Intersection: turn, slide6 and press the controller.

X Select an entry (Y page 84).

Saving an address You can store the address you have entered either as your home address or as another navigable contact in the address book (Y page 163). X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 83).

X To select Save: slide6, turn and press the controller.

X As the home address: select As "My Address". COMAND stores your home address under My Address in the list of contacts.

X As a contact: select As New Address Book Entry.

X Select Not Classified, Home or Work. X Enter a last name and first name (Y page 36).

X To select OK: turn and press the controller. The destination address is saved in the address book as a navigable contact.

Destination input 85

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Starting route calculation

The entered destination appears in the address entry menu. X To confirm Start or Continue: press the controller. If you select Start: the route is calculated with the current route settings (Y page 80). While route calculation is in progress, an arrowwill indicate the direction to your destination. Once the route has been calculated, route guidance begins. If the vehicle is traveling on a non- digitized road, the system displays the linear distance to the destination, the direction to the destination and the Road Not Mapped message. If you select Continue: alternative routes are calculated. You can display these and select them for route guidance (Y page 110). If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance.

X To select Yes or Set as Intermediate Destination: turn and press the controller. Yes cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination. Set as Intermediate Destination adds the newly entered intermediate destination in addition to the existing destination. The intermediate destinations menu appears (Y page 94). i The route is calculated using digital map data. The calculation time depends on the dis- tance from the destination, for example. The calculated route may differ from the ideal route, e.g. due to road works or incomplete map data. Please also refer to the notes about the digital map (Y page 130).

Calling up the keyword search X To select the magnifying glass symbol: while in the address entry menu, slide6, turn and then press the controller.

Viewing the vicinity of the destination X To select symbol:: turn the controller and press to confirm. You can explore the destination area.

86 Destination input Na

vi ga tio

n

Requirement for exploring a destination: mbrace must be activated for Internet access (Y page 173).

Keyword search

Entering keywords

The keyword search is used to help find des- tinations using fragments of words. The key- word search is tolerant of errors. It can be used for an address or a POI. For example, you can search for the Houses of Parliament or Big Ben. The keyword search finds geoto- lerant hits. If, for example, you are searching for a street located on the edge of a city, the search will also cover adjacent smaller cities. The keyword search supports languages using Latin characters. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Keyword Search. X Enter the first few letters of the city and street, e.g. STUT and KN. While entering the information, the number of exact matches/all hits is shown. ---/--- is displayed if fewer than three characters have been entered. 999+ is displayed if there are toomany hits.

X Select OK.

The search results are divided into catego- ries, such as addresses. The number of exact/total hits is shown in brackets. The search results will be displayed if POI Search and/or Fuzzy Search are enabled in the search options. Selecting an address X Press the controller. The search results are displayed.

Exact hits are shown at the very top of the list. Hits are listed alphabetically. The search term that you entered is highlighted in orange in the entries. X To select an entry: turn and press the con- troller. The address entry menu appears, showing the destination address.

X To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 86).

Destination input 87

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Selecting a point of interest X To select POIs in the Vicinity or All POIs: turn and press the controller. A list appears.

X Select a point of interest. The POI is shown.

X To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 86).

Using online search X To select Online Search: turn and press the controller. The search switches to the online func- tions. Online search requirement: mbrace must be activated for Internet access (Y page 173).

Selecting search options X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Keyword Search. X To select Search Options: slide5, turn and press the controller.

X Select Fuzzy Search or POI Search. Switch the setting on O or off . Error-tolerant search: useful if parts of the address are incomplete or the spelling is unclear. POI search: points of interest are taken into account in the search.

Selecting the country X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Keyword Search. X To select Country: slide5, turn and press the controller. The alphabetical list of countries is dis- played.

X Select a country: turn and press the con- troller.

Searching via COMAND Requirement: mbrace must be activated for Internet access (Y page 173). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Keyword Search. X To select Online Search: slide5, turn and press the controller. The search switches to the online func- tions.

Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations

COMAND automatically stores the last 50 destinations. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

88 Destination input Na

vi ga tio

n

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Last Destinations. X Select the destination. The address entry menu appears, showing the destination address.

X To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 86).

Selecting an address book contact as a destination

You can select navigable address book con- tacts as the destination. These are identified by theL symbol. If you have already entered and saved your home address, you can select this as the destination by using My Address. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Contacts. X Select the destination. The address entry menu appears, showing the contact and associated destination address.

X To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 86).

Selecting a destination from POIs

Calling up the points of interest menu

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From POIs.

Destination input 89

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Defining the position for the point of interest search

Selection Instructions

Menu item Near Desti nation (when route guidance is active)

X Call up the POI menu (Y page 89). X To select Near Destination: turn and press the controller. X Select a POI category (Y page 91).

Menu item Current Position Search in the vicinity of the current vehicle posi- tion

X Call up the POI menu (Y page 89). X To select Current Position: turn and press the controller. X Select a POI category (Y page 91).

Menu item Other City After entering a city, the search is performed within the city's bounda- ries

Option 1 X Call up the POI menu (Y page 89). X To select Other City: turn and press the controller. X Select the country, if desired (Y page 84). X Enter the city (Y page 84). X Select a POI category (Y page 91). Option 2: X Enter a city in the address entry menu (Y page 84). X To select POIs: slide6, turn and press the controller. X Select a POI category (Y page 91).

90 Destination input Na

vi ga tio

n

Selection Instructions

Menu item Search By Name Search for all POIs on the digital map or around one of the three previ- ously specified positions

X Call up the POI menu (Y page 89). X To select Search By Name: turn and press the controller. X Select All POIs or one of the three previously selected posi- tions. The point of interest list with character bar appears.

X Enter a name. or X To select Mercedes-Benz Service: turn and press the con- troller.

Menu item Search By Phone Number This function gives you access to all points of interest that have a phone number.

X Call up the POI menu (Y page 89). X To select Search By Phone Number: turn and press the con- troller. You will see a list of phone numbers.

X Enter the telephone number. The telephone number consists of: Rthe country code (international dialing code) Rthe area code When entering the area code, omit the leading "0". Rthe telephone number of the participating caller

Selecting a POI category

POI categories appear after choosing the menu items Near Destination, Current Position and after entering another city.

X Select a POI category: turn and press the controller. TheG symbol after an entry shows that further categories are available.

X Select a sub-category. The POI search covers a 240 mile (400 km) radius around the selected position. Once the search is completed, the POI list is displayed. The search results display the following information: Ran arrow that shows the linear direction to the POI (search around vehicle posi- tion) Rthe linear distance to the point of interest Rthe name of the point of interest

X Select a point of interest. The complete address of the POI is shown.

Destination input 91

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Selecting a point of interest Requirement for "Calling a POI": a mobile phone is connected to COMAND (Y page 138). Requirements for "Viewing the vicinity of the destination" and "Loading data from the Internet": mbrace must be activated for Internet access (Y page 173).

The complete address of the POI is shown. Viewing the vicinity of the destination X To select symbol:: turn the controller and press to confirm. If street images are available, the street in the vicinity of the destination address is shown.

Calling up the map X Select Map. X Move the map, change the map scale and select the POI (Y page 93). Calling up the POI X Select Call. If a telephone number is available, COMAND switches to the telephone function.

Loading data from the Internet X Select www. If an Internet address is available, data is loaded from the Internet.

Saving a POI X To select Save: turn and press the controller. The POI can be saved as: Ra navigable contact in the address book RMy Address

Starting route calculation X To select Start: press the controller (Y page 86).

92 Destination input Na

vi ga tio

n

Using the map

: Crosshair ; Distance of crosshair position from current vehicle position X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller. X Select Using Map. The map with crosshair is shown.

X To move the map: slide1,4 or2 the controller. X To change the map scale: turn the controller until the desired map scale is selected. The scale is displayed at the bottom. Turning clockwise zooms out from the map; turning counter-clockwise zooms in.

X To select a destination: press the controller. The list contains the Menumenu item. If there aremultiple destinations around the crosshair, a selection list will also appear.

X To show the menu: press the controller.

Destination input 93

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To select a destination from the selection list: turn and press the controller. If the digital map provides navigable address data, youwill see the destination address in the address entry menu.

X To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 86).

Entering intermediate destinations

Introduction You can also map the route to the destination yourself by entering up to four intermediate destinations. The sequence of the intermedi- ate destinations can be changed at any time. COMAND provides a selection of predefined destinations in eight categories for this pur- pose, e.g. GAS STATION or RESTAURANT. You can also use the destination entry options to enter intermediate destinations.

Creating intermediate destinations

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Intermediate Destinations. The destination is entered in the intermedi- ate destinations menu.

X To select Add New:: press the controller.

X To select a category or Other: turn and press the controller. After selecting a category, the POIs which are available along the route and in the vicinity are displayed. COMAND first searches for destinations along the route. The search for destinations is then initiated in the area around the vehi- cle position.

X After selecting Other, select one of the destination entry options from the list.

Selection Action

Address Entry

X Enter a destination by address (Y page 84).

Keyword Search

X Select a destination by means of a keyword search (Y page 87).

From Last Destina tions

X Select a destination from the list of last des- tinations (Y page 88).

From Con tacts

X Select a contact from the address book as the destination (Y page 89).

From POIs X Select a point of inter- est (Y page 89).

94 Destination input Na

vi ga tio

n

Selection Action

Using Map X Enter a destination using the map (Y page 93).

From Memory Card

X Select a personal POI (Y page 99).

From Mercedes- Benz Apps

X Enter a destination from Mercedes-Benz Apps (Y page 96).

Using Geo- Coordinates

X Enter a destination using the geo-coordi- nates (Y page 97).

X To select a POI: turn the controller and press to confirm. After selecting a POI or entering a destina- tion, the address of the intermediate des- tination is displayed. After entering a destination using the map, the address entrymenu is displayed. Start is highlighted.

Accepting an intermediate destination X To select Start: press the controller. The destination is entered in the intermedi- ate destinations menu. If in the basic settings Calculate Alter native Routes is enabled, the menu item Continue is displayed instead of Start (Y page 80).

X To select details: turn and press the con- troller.

X To make a call: select Call. If the intermediate destination has a tele- phone number and a mobile phone is con- nected to COMAND (Y page 138), the call is connected.

X To call up the map: select Map. X You can move the map and select the des- tination.

X To store an intermediate destination in the destination memory: select Save (Y page 118).

Editing intermediate destinations You can perform the following functions: Rchange intermediate destinations Rswitch the sequence of the intermediate destinations in the intermediate destina- tions menu Rdelete intermediate destinations

i You cannot edit POIs.

Destination input 95

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To select an intermediate destination in the intermediate destinations menu: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To change an intermediate destination: select Edit in the menu.

X Change the address, e.g. the city and street.

X To select OK: turn and press the controller. The intermediate destinations menu appears and displays the changed inter- mediate destination.

You can change the sequence of the inter- mediate destinations entered and the desti- nation. To change the sequence, at least one intermediate destination and the destination must have been entered. X To change the order: in the menu, select Move.

X Turn the controller andmove the intermedi- ate destination or destination to the desired position.

X Press the controller. X To delete an intermediate destination: select Delete in the menu.

Accepting intermediate destinations for the route X To select Start Route Guidance in the intermediate destinations menu: press the controller. The route is calculated with the entered intermediate destinations. If an intermediate destination was passed during route guidance, the intermediate destination will be displayed in the inter- mediate destinations menu with a green tick mark. Once the route has been recal- culated, the intermediate destination is deleted from the intermediate destinations menu.

Searching for a gas station when the fuel level is low Requirement: the setting Gas on Reserve must be enabled (Y page 81). If the fuel tank reserve level is displayed, you will see the Gas on Reserve Do you want to start a search for surrounding gas stations? message. X To select Yes or No: turn and press the con- troller. If you select Yes, the gas station search starts. When the search is complete, a list of the gas stations available along the route or in the vicinity is displayed. If you select No, the search is canceled.

X Select the gas station. The address of the gas station is displayed.

X To select Start: press the controller. The selected gas station is entered into position 1 of the intermediate destinations menu. Route guidance begins. If the intermediate destinations menu already contains four intermediate desti- nations, a prompt will be displayed, asking you whether you wish to enter the gas sta- tion into position 1. If you select Yes, the gas station is transferred into the list and intermediate destination 4 is deleted.

Entering a destination from Mercedes-Benz Apps Requirement: mbrace must be activated for the Mercedes-Benz Apps (Y page 173). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Mercedes-Benz Apps. A list shows the available destinations that have been transmitted to the vehicle up to this point (Y page 181).

96 Destination input Na

vi ga tio

n

Using geo-coordinates X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select Using Geo-Coordinates. Geo-coordinates are entered in degrees, minutes and seconds.

Entering the latitude and longitude coor- dinates X To change the value: turn the controller. X To move the selection within the line: slide 1 the controller.

X To move the selection between lines: slide 4 the controller.

X To confirm the value: press the controller. Saving destination X To select Save: turn and press the control- ler. The destination can be saved as: Ra navigable contact in the address book Rto an SD memory card RMy Address

Starting route calculation X To select Start Route Guidance: turn and press the controller.

Personal POIs and routes

General notes The use of personal POIs for displaying traffic surveillance equipment is not permitted in every country. Please observe the country- specific regulations and always drive at a suit- able speed. Personal POIs are filed in categories: RNot Classified Standard entry for personal POIs RMercedes-Benz Apps

Personal POIs (destinations, routes) that you have imported via the online functions (Y page 183) RCategories which you have created your- self, e.g. on your PC

Personal routes are not categorized.

Settings for personal POIs

Displaying on the map

Requirement: an SD memory card with per- sonal POIs is inserted (Y page 215). All personal POIs of the selected category are displayed on the map with a corresponding symbol. If the "Alert when approaching" (Y page 98) function is activated, the symbols are dis- played up to a map scale of 2 km. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Personal POIs. X Select Display on the Map. The menu displays the categories available on the SD memory card.

X To select a category: turn the controller and press to confirm. All personal POIs in the selected category are displayed O or not displayed , depending on the previous status.

Personal POIs and routes 97

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Alert when approaching

Requirement: an SD memory card with per- sonal POIs is inserted (Y page 215). If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI, this is highlighted on themap and/or an audi- ble signal sounds. For this purpose both the corresponding func- tion "Alert when approaching" and the cate- gory containing the personal POI must be activated. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Personal POIs. X Select Approaching POI Cue. The menu displays the categories available on the SD memory card.

X Select Audible or Optical. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

X To select a category: turn the controller and press to confirm. The function is switched onO or off, for all personal POIs of this category, depend- ing on the previous setting.

Saving personal POIs and routes

General notes Personal POIs and routes are geodata which are saved in the open GPX (GPS Exchange) format on the SD memory card.

Personal POI from current vehicle posi- tion or crosshair position X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 215). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X When the map is displayed, press the con- troller until a message appears. The current vehicle position is saved to the Not Classified category on the SDmem- ory card and also stored in the "Last desti- nations" memory. If the "Move map" function is selected (Y page 79), the crosshair position is saved. i If no SDmemory card is inserted, the per- sonal POI will only be stored in the "Last destinations" memory.

Personal POI from destination address X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 215). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X Call up the address entry menu and enter the destination address (Y page 83).

X To select Save: slide6 the controller. X Turn and press the controller. X To select To Memory Card: turn and press the controller.

X Enter the name. X Select a category. The current address is saved as a personal point of interest on the SD memory card.

i You can select a destination from the From Last Destinations or From Con tacts memories and save it on the SD memory card.

98 Personal POIs and routes Na

vi ga tio

n

RFrom Last Destinations (Y page 88) RFrom Contacts (Y page 89)

Personal route from a tour including intermediate destinations X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 215). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X Enter a destination, e.g. by address (Y page 83).

X Start route calculation (Y page 86). X Create intermediate destinations (Y page 94).

X To select Save As Personal Route in the intermediate destinations menu: turn and press the controller. The route is saved in the "Personal routes" file on the SD memory card.

Importing personal destinations and routes via Mercedes-Benz Apps You can useMercedes-Benz Apps (e.g. Down- load POI, Local Search) to import destinations to navigation (Y page 181). These have their own symbol and are filed in the Mercedes- Benz Apps category. You can save the imported destinations and routes as personal POIs and routes (Y page 98). When importing routes, please note: RThe Mercedes-Benz Apps may generate a route based on a different map from the one used by COMAND. Points on the route may therefore be situated off the digital roads. For this reason an imported route commenced in COMANDmay deviate from the original route from the Mercedes-Benz Apps. RThe Mercedes-Benz Apps minimize the number of route points offered. For this reason an imported route commenced in

COMAND may deviate from the original route from the Mercedes-Benz Apps.

Selecting and editing personal POIs and routes

Selecting

Personal POI X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 215). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Memory Card. The menu displays the categories available on the SD memory card.

X To select a category or Personal Routes: turn and press the controller. The available personal POIs or route entries are displayed.

X Select personal POI or personal route. The address of the personal POI appears or the personal route is displayed in the map.

If a large number of entries are stored, a reg- ister for quick selection appears. Personal POIs and routes can be saved and sorted with different character sets (e. g. ABC, Cyrillic, Arabic).

Personal POIs and routes 99

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Selecting a register X Slide9 the controller. X To select a character: turn and press the controller.

Selecting character set for sorting X To highlightB, slide9the controller. X Press the controller. The available character sets are displayed. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Turn and press the controller.

Editing

Personal route X Select personal POI or personal route (Y page 99).

Exploring personal POI or route X To select Map: turn and press the controller. The map with the crosshair appears and shows the destination.

X Scroll the map (Y page 120). X Set the map scale (Y page 120). X To return to the menu: press the% but- ton.

Placing a call to the personal POI X To select Call: turn and press the control- ler. If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND and the telephone number is available, the call is connected (Y page 145).

Changing name and symbol X To select Edit: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select Change Name or Edit Icon. X To change name: enter character (Y page 36).

X To change symbol: select a symbol. The symbol is saved.

Deleting personal POI or route X To select Delete: turn and press the con- troller. A prompt will appear.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the personal destination or personal route is deleted.

Selecting outward and return route X To select Swap: turn and press the control- ler. The starting and destination positions of your personal route, and thus the direction for route guidance, are switched round. One-way streets or restricted intersections are taken into consideration. Therefore, the outward and return routes may differ from each other.

Saving personal POI X To select Save: turn and press the control- ler.

X To continue saving (Y page 118). Starting route guidance X To select Start: turn and press the con- troller.

100 Personal POIs and routes Na

vi ga tio

n

Recording the route

General notes When recording the route, bear in mind the following: Rif the SD memory card is inserted, it must not removed during recording. Rif route recording is started manually, it must be finishedmanually before COMAND is switched off (e. g. when the engine is switched off). RCOMAND minimizes the number of route points recorded. Therefore when the recorded route is subsequently com- menced, it may differ from the route that was originally recorded.

Starting/finishing route recording X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 215). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Memory Card. X Select Start Route Recording. The route is recorded and REC appears at the bottom edge of the screen.

X To stop recording, select End Route Recording from the menu. The route is stored under Personal Routes.

Displaying/editing the recorded route X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 215). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Memory Card.

X Select Personal Routes. Previously recorded routes are displayed.

X To select Route: turn and press the con- troller. The map appears with a menu. The recorded route is shown on themap in blue.

Starting route calculation X Select Start. Changing the name and symbol X Select Edit. X Select Change Name or Edit Icon. X To change the name: enter characters (Y page 36).

X To change symbol: select a symbol. The symbol is saved.

Route guidance

General notes For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg- ulations always have priority over system driving recommendations. COMAND calculates the route to the destina- tion without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stopping zone Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges COMAND may give differing navigation com- mands if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example, if the road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during

Route guidance 101

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg- ulations always have priority over the sys- tem's driving recommendations. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated (Y page 86). COMAND guides you to your destination by means of navigation announcements in the form of audible navigation announcements and route guidance displays. The route guidance displays can be seen if the display is switched to navigation mode. If you do not follow the navigation announce- ments or if you leave the calculated route, COMAND automatically calculates a new route to the destination. If the digital map contains the corresponding information, the following applies: Rduring route guidance, COMAND tries to avoid roads with restricted access. Those roads, for example, that are closed to through-traffic. Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g. closed on Sundays and public holidays) are considered for route guidance on days when they are open. For this purpose, the relevant times must be correctly stored in the database.

102 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

Displays during route guidance

Change of direction Changes of direction have three phases: Rpreparation phase Rannouncement phase Rchange-of-direction phase Changes in direction are also shown in the multifunction display (see the vehicle Operator's Manual). Preparation phase: COMAND prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced by the "Prepare to turn right message", for instance. You see the full-screen map. Announcement phase: COMAND announces the imminent change of direction. The change of direction is announced ahead of time, such as with the announcement "Turn right in 200 meters". The display is now split into two sectors. The map is shown on the left side of the display, and a detailed image of the intersection or a 3D image of the imminent change of direction is shown on the right side of the display.

: Next road ; Point at which the change of direction takes place (white dot) = Change of direction (turn right here) ? Distance to the next change of direction Change-of-direction phase: COMAND announces the immediate change of direction. The change of direction is announced ahead of time, e.g. with the announcement "Now turn right". The display is split in two like in the announcement phase.

Route guidance 103

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

The change of direction is performed when the light-color bar on the right drops down to 0 ft and the current vehicle position symbol has reached the white change-of-direction point. When the change of direction is completed, the map will appear in full screen mode again.

The image shows an example of route guidance at a highway intersection when driving on a highway.

104 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

Lane recommendations

: Lanes not recommended (dark gray) ; Possible lane (light gray) = Recommended lanes (white) If the digital map contains the relevant data, COMAND can display lane recommendations on multilane roads for the next change of direction. Lane not recommended:: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible lane;: you will be able to complete the next change of direction only in this lane. Recommended lane=: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that. COMAND shows the lane recommendations for the next two changes of direction. The mul- tifunction display also shows lane recommendations (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).

: Approaching new lane During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. These will be shown in the display of lane recommendations with a lower boundary line.

Route guidance 105

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Once the destination is reached, you will see the checkered flag. Route guidance is finished.

Highway information Requirement: the map content Highway Information must be enabled. Display mode:while driving on the highway, gas stations, rest stops, rest areas and highway exits are displayed along with their immediate distances from the current vehicle position.

X To call up the selection mode: while displaying the highway information, slide9 the controller. The marker is on the highway information. The associated position is marked on the map.

X To select the desired rest stop/highway exit: turn and press the controller.

106 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

Highway information facilitates route guidance to a POI and use of the traffic jam function. The remaining route on the highway in this case is blocked in the direction of travel from the selected exit. Starting route guidance and using additional functions X To select a POI: turn the controller and press to confirm. The POI details are displayed. The POI can now be: Rstored in the address book (Y page 118) Rviewed on the map (Y page 125) Rcalled if a phone is connected and a phone number is available (Y page 145). Rselected for route guidance and a route to it calculated (Y page 86).

Using the traffic jam function X To select Detour: turn and press the controller. The traffic jam function appears (Y page 112).

Navigation announcements

Repeating navigation announcements If you missed the current navigation announcement, you can call it up again. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X Select+: turn and press the controller.

i If the Repeat Spoken Driving Recomm. function has previously been added as a favorite, you can alternatively select the

function using the favorites button (Y page 41).

Setting the volume manually X Set the volume using the thumbwheel dur- ing the navigation announcement. i When you start the engine, the volumewill be at its lowest setting.

Switching navigation announcements on/off X To switch off navigation announce- ments: during a navigation announcement,

Route guidance 107

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

press the thumbwheel to the right of the controller.

or X During a navigation announcement, press the8 button on themultifunction steer- ing wheel. The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated. message appears.

X To switch navigation announcements back on: press the controller.

X Select+: turn and press the controller. COMAND automatically switches the naviga- tion announcements back on when: Ra new route is calculated. Ryou switch COMAND on again or start the engine.

A navigation message is given if the route is recalculated during dynamic route guidance due to new traffic reports (Y page 113).

108 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

Canceling/continuing route guidance

Can celling route guidance X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller. X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance. The blue route line is no longer shown on the map.

Resuming route guidance

X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Destination: turn and press the controller. X Select Continue Route Guidance. COMAND calculates the route.

Route information

Destination information

Route guidance 109

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Route: turn and press the controller. X Select Destination Information. The destination and existing intermediate destinations are displayed with distances, travel time and arrival time.

X To select destination or intermediate destination: turn and press the controller. The address appears.

X Select Save. The destination or intermediate destination can be saved as: Ra navigable contact in the address book RMy Address

X To call up a map: select Map. X Move the map, change the map scale and select the destination or the intermediate desti- nation (Y page 93).

X To call the destination or intermediate destination: select Call. If a phone is connected and a phone number is available, COMAND switches to the tele- phone function.

Alternative route

If the Calculate Alternative Routes setting is activatedO, different routeswill be offered each time a route is calculated (Y page 80). You can also view these for the current route any time from COMAND. Routes 1, 2 and 4 are displayed with a dark blue line (Y page 80). Route 3 is the most economic route and is displayed with a green line. X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Route: turn and press the controller. X Select Alternative Route. Route 1 is shown.

X To display additional routes: select Next or Prev.. X To start a new route guidance: select Start.

110 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

Route list

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Route: turn and press the controller. X Select Route List. The route list shows the next change of direction and the immediate distances from the current vehicle position.

X To display additional route sections: turn the controller. The position of the change of direction that belongs to the respective route section is indi- cated on the map with a cross.

Route guidance 111

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Where am I?

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Position: turn and press the controller. X Select Where am I?. The street you are currently on and the previous and next intersections are displayed.

Traffic jam function

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Route: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Detour. X To specify the start of the traffic jam section: select Beginning. The next possible traffic jam section start- ing point is marked.

X Turn the controller. The marking moves along the route to the next starting position.

X Press the controller. The start of the traffic jam is set.

X To specify the end of a traffic jam sec- tion: select End. The next possible traffic jam section end point is marked.

X Turn and press the controller. X To calculate the detour: select Start.

Off-road

General notes The COMAND navigation system may direct you to off-road routes that your vehicle may not be capable of traversing through without damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is the drivers sole responsibility to determine the suitability of the route. Off-road routes may be of varying conditions and their appro- priateness for use may be affected by various

112 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

factors such as time of day, time of year and immediate weather conditions that cannot be judged or taken into consideration by the COMAND system.

Route guidance to an off-road destina- tion COMAND can guide you to destinations which are within the area of the digital map, but which are not themselves on the map. These destinations are known as off-road destinations, which you can enter using the map, for example. In these cases, COMAND guides you for as long as possible with navi- gation announcements and displays on roads known to the system. If the vehicle reaches an areawhich is not part of the digital map, the display appears as a split-screen view. On the right, an arrow appears that points to the off-road destina- tion. Youwill hear the announcement: "Please follow the arrow on the display". As the vehi- cle approaches the destination, you will see a display to this effect.

Route guidance from an off-road loca- tion to a destination Off-road location: the vehicle's position is on the digital map, but the map does not contain any information about that location. COMAND is also able to guide you to a des- tination even from an off-road location. At the start of route guidance, you will see the Road Not Mapped message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The arrow shows the compass heading to the actual destination. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known to the system, route guidance contin- ues in the usual way.

Off-road during route guidance Due to road works, for example, there may be differences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road.

In such cases, the system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle position on the digital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off- road position. In the display, youwill then see the Road Not Mapped message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The direction arrow shows the compass heading to the destination. As soon as the system can assign the vehicle position to the map again, route guidance continues in the usual way.

Real-time traffic reports

Prerequisites i This function is currently not available for Canada.

In order to receive real-time traffic reports via satellite radio, you need to subscribe to SIR- IUS XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service. Further information on satellite radio (Y page 202). COMAND can receive traffic reports via sat- ellite radio and take account of these for route guidance in the navigation system. Received traffic reports are displayed on the map either as text or as symbols.

Real-time traffic reports 113

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Real-time traffic reports on the map

: Icon indicating an incident on the route (traffic jam icon) ; Display for traffic reports = Map scale ? Icon delimiting the section of the route affected (color lines) When; is displayed, traffic reports can be received or traffic reports are available. If it is not displayed, no reception is possible. COMAND can show certain traffic incidents on the map. Traffic reports are shown on the map at scales of 1/32 mi to 20 mi. X To hide the menu: slide5 and press the controller. The map can be seen in the full-screen display.

X To set the map scale: turn the controller until the desired map scale is selected.

: Traffic jam on the route ; Slow-moving traffic on the route = Road blocked ? Traffic disruption A Traffic warning B Dashed red and white line delimiting the traffic warning C Road block (crosses along the affected road)

114 Real-time traffic reports Na

vi ga tio

n

D Slow-moving traffic (orange line along the affected route) E Traffic jam (red line along the affected route)

Displaying real-time traffic reports

Starting a search for traffic reports

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X To close the report: press the controller.

Traffic symbol information

: Affected roads with indication of direction ; Symbol for report type, e.g. traffic flow

message X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Traffic Symbol Information: turn and press the controller. The map appears and shows the available traffic information as icons. The first traffic information is highlighted.

X To highlight additional traffic symbols, select Next or Previous.

X To move the map: select Map. You can move the map to enable further traffic information to be displayed.

You can have the traffic report relevant to a traffic icon shown. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller.

The report shows the following information: RState/province, road and display of the affected direction RSection of the road to which the traffic report applies RTraffic icon and traffic report X To close the detailed display: press the % button.

Real-time traffic reports 115

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Displaying reports on the route

The function is only availablewhile route guid- ance is active. It shows the available traffic reports affecting the current route. If there are no reports for the route or the function is not supported in the selected lan- guage: the Messages On Routemenu item is gray and cannot be selected. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Messages On Route: turn and press the controller. The traffic report window appears. Several traffic reports may be available for the cal- culated route, marked for example by 1/3. The report shows the following information: RState/province, road and display of the affected direction RSection of the road to which the traffic report applies RTraffic icon and traffic report

X To display the next/previous traffic report: turn the controller.

X To close the display: press the% but- ton.

Displaying all traffic reports

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select All Messages: turn and press the controller. A list is shown containing all roads, areas or regions affected by traffic reports. Roads, areas or regions not on the route also appear in the list.

X To select the road, area or region: turn the controller and press to confirm. The traffic report is displayed. Theremay be several traffic reports for the affected road. You can find an example of a traffic report here: (Y page 116).

X To close the display: press the% but- ton.

Settings for the display on the map You can switch these displays on/off on the map: RIncidents RSpeed & Flow RFree Flow X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

116 Real-time traffic reports Na

vi ga tio

n

X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Traffic Information On Map: turn and press the controller.

X Select Incidents,Speed & Flow or Free Flow. The display is activated O or deactivated .

Reading out traffic reports on the route

Introduction The read-aloud function is only availablewhile route guidance is active. It reads out traffic reports affecting the current route. You can select from the following text reader properties: RLanguage (Y page 52) RText reader speed (Y page 48) You can start the text reader function man- ually or set it to automatic.

Starting the text reader function man- ually X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Read Out All Messages on Route. COMAND reads out the reports in sequence. If there are no reports for the route, the Read Out All Messages on Routemenu item is gray and cannot be selected.

X To cancel the read-aloud function: select Cancel Read-Aloud Function. COMAND reads out the current report and then exits the read-aloud function.

Automatic read-aloud function X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Read Traffic Announcements Automatically. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off .

Recalculating the route dynamically The Dynamic Traffic Route route type takes into account all of the traffic reports it receives for the current route when calculat- ing the route (Y page 80). If you have selected Dynamic Traffic Route as the route type, COMANDguides you to your destination along the updated route.

Storing destinations

General notes If a route to a destination has been calculated, COMAND saves the destination to the last destinations memory. If the memory is full, COMAND overwrites the oldest destination. When you save the current vehicle position or a crosshair position, this position is stored in the "Last destinations" memory. You can save destinations permanently in the address book and on an SDmemory card. For instance, this is possible immediately after entering an address.

Storing destinations 117

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Storing the destination in the address book

The example shows a POI. X To select Save: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears.

X New contact: select As New Address Book Entry. If the address book already contains con- tacts, the entry Add to Address Book Entry is also available.

X Select Not Classified, Home or Work. An input menu shows the destination address.

X Enter a surname and first name. Character entry (Y page 36).

X To select OK: turn and press the controller. The Saving Successful message appears. The destination address is saved in the address book as a navigable contact.

X To add to a contact: select Add to Address Book Entry. The address book appears.

X Search for a contact (Y page 163). X Press the controller. The Saving Successful message appears. The destination address is added to a contact in the address book. Telephone numbers are not transferred to the telephone number fields of the address book. After selecting the destination address from the address book for naviga- tion, the associated telephone number will be displayed.

If the contact already has two destination addresses, a prompt will appear asking if a destination address should be overwritten.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, a list showing both des- tination addresses appears.

X To select the destination address: turn and press the controller. The destination address is overwritten.

Saving destination to the SD memory card X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 215). X E.g. display a point of interest (Y page 118).

X To select Save: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears.

X Select To Memory Card. X Not Classified or, if available, select a category that you have created yourself. An input menu appears.

X Enter a surname and first name. Character entry (Y page 37).

X Select OK. The Saving Successful message appears. The destination is saved to the SD memory card.

Saving the current vehicle position X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Position: turn and press the controller.

X Select Save. The current vehicle position is saved in "Last destinations".

118 Storing destinations Na

vi ga tio

n

Saving the crosshair position X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To display the crosshair: press the con- troller.

X Move the map to the desired position (Y page 79).

X To show the menu: press the controller. X To select Position: turn and press the controller.

X Select Save. The crosshair position is saved in the last destinations.

Editing the last destinations

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Destination: turn and press the controller.

X Select From Last Destinations. The "Last destinations" memory appears.

X To save the destination: select the desti- nation.

X Store the destination in the address book (Y page 118).

X To view the details:while in the "Last des- tinations" memory, turn the controller and highlight the entry.

X Slide9 the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Details: press the controller. i The destination address can be changed if desired. For instance, a different street or house number can be selected.

X To delete one or all destinations:while in the "Last destinations" memory, turn the controller and highlight the entry.

X Slide9 the controller. A menu appears.

X To select Delete or Delete All: turn and press the controller. A prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No. Selecting Yes deletes the selected desti- nation or all destinations.

Storing destinations 119

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Map functions

General notes Company logos displayed on the map are trademarks of the respective companies and used solely for the purpose of indicating the locations of these companies. The use of such logos on the map does not indicate approval of, support of or advertising by these companies for the navigation system itself.

Map settings

Setting the map scale

Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the menu is faded out (Y page 78). The lower left-hand section of themap shows the currently setmap scale and compass needle. Right-hand-drive vehicles: the currently setmap scale and compass needle are displayed in the lower right-hand section of the map. Displaying the map in full screen mode X To hide the menu: press the% button. or X Slide up5 or down6 the controller to the center of the map and press.

X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn the controller, the scale bar appears on the bottom of the display.

X Turn the controller until the needle points to the desired map scale. Rectangle: in the scale bar indicates the last map scale set when a scale was selected. Once you are finished selecting a map scale, the new map scale will be shown. Once you are finished selecting a map scale, the new map scale will be shown. i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touch- pad (Y page 30).

120 Map functions Na

vi ga tio

n

Selecting map orientation

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the controller. X Select Map Orientation. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Turn and press the controller. The map orientation is set. i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touch- pad (Y page 30).

Map orientation Explanation

North Up 0 The map view is displayed so that north is always up.

Heading Up The map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The direction of travel is always at the top; the red tip of the symbol points north.

3-D Map The map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The map displays a 3D oblique view with elevation; the red tip of the symbol points north.

Selecting map content The following settings are available: RPoint of interest symbols on the map POIs can be displayed as symbols in themap display. POIs include, for example, gas stations, hotels and restaurants. RText Information On Map At the bottom of the display, you can specify whether to display geo-coordinates or not to display text information for the street you are currently on. RHighway information The following can be displayed during route guidance: - the nearest gas stations and rest stops - rest areas and highway exits - and their immediate distances from the vehicle's current position

Map functions 121

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

RNext crossroads If route guidance is not active, the next crossroads can be displayed at the upper edge of the display. RMap version The number of the map data version is shown. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Selecting POI symbols on the map X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the controller. X Select Map Content. X Select POI Symbols On Map. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Turn and press the controller. Default Symbols shows symbols of predefined categories in the map. Custom Symbols allows symbols to be selected from other/all available categories. i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touch- pad (Y page 30).

X Turn and press the controller. You have the option of selecting symbols to be displayed O or not displayed on themap. The list shows all symbols that are contained on the digital map across all countries. How- ever, not all points of interest are available in all countries. As a result, certain symbols may not be displayed on the map, even if the symbol display is switched on.

Selecting text information on the map X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the controller. X Select Map Content. X Select Text Information On Map. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Turn and press the controller. Current Street shows the current street at the bottom of the display.

122 Map functions Na

vi ga tio

n

Geo-coordinates shows the longitude and latitude, elevation and number of satellites received. The elevation shown may deviate from the actual elevation.

X Turn and press the controller. i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touch- pad (Y page 30).

Switching highway information on/off X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the controller. X Select Map Content. X Select Highway Information. Switch the display in the map on O or off . Further information (Y page 106). i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touch- pad (Y page 30).

Displaying the next crossroads X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: press the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the controller. X Select Map Content. X Select Next Intersecting Street. Switch the display in the map on O or off .

Showing the map version X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: press the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the controller. X Select Map Content. X Select Map Version. Information on the current map version is shown. i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touch- pad (Y page 30).

Map functions 123

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Rotating the 3D map

You can use this function to explore the vicinity of the destination in a 3D view. The function is available in all map scales. X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller.

X To select Position: turn and press the controller. X Select 3D Map Rotation. X Turn the controller to change to the 3D map perspective. i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touch- pad (Y page 30).

Other functions: RMoving the map (Y page 79) RChanging the map scale (Y page 120)

Map display

Displaying the navigation map

124 Map functions Na

vi ga tio

n

COMAND displays the navigation map and globe satellite images. This allows for a realistic map display free from distortion in all map scales. Other functions: RMoving the map (Y page 79) RChanging the map scale (Y page 120)

Building images

In the map scales 1/32 mi (20 m) and 1/16 mi (50 m) important buildings are depicted realistically on the map. Other buildings are shown as models.

Elevation model

Cities located in mountainous regions are realistically depicted using elevation modeling.

Country-specific information You can call up information on the traffic con- ditions in the country you are currently driving

in via the COMAND Internet and online func- tion. The availability of information is country- dependent. Information can include maxi-

Map functions 125

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

mum speeds, driving with low-beam head- lamps or legal alcohol limits, for example. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: slide6 the control- ler.

X To select Position: turn and press the controller.

X Select Country Information. When the online connection has been established, the available country informa- tion appears. i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touchpad (Y page 30).

X To return to navigation: press the% button.

126 Map functions Na

vi ga tio

n

Avoiding an area

General information COMAND enables you to avoid areas you do not wish to drive through. If you activate or deactivate a route block while route guidance is active, COMAND will cal- culate a new route. If you activate or deactivate a route block while route guidance is inactive, COMAND will use the new setting for the next route guidance. The calculated route may include an area to be avoided if: Ryour destination is located in such an area. Rthere is no alternative route of comparable length available Highways within blocked areas are always taken into consideration in the route calculation.

Avoiding a new area

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the controller. X Select Route Settings. X Select Avoid Options. X Select Avoid Area. X Select Avoid New Area. A menu appears.

X Select Using Map or Address Entry. If you select Using Map, the map with crosshair appears. If you select Address Entry, the address entry menu appears where you can enter the address (Y page 83). The map appears with the crosshair after the address is entered. i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touch- pad (Y page 30).

Map functions 127

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To select an area: when the map with crosshair appears, press the controller. A red square appears on the map, symbolizing the area to be blocked.

X To change the size of the area, turn the controller. Themap scale is shown at the bottomof the display. The needle is on themap scale currently selected.

X When the desired size is set, press the controller. The area is entered into the list.

Avoiding an area: functions

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button. X To show the menu: slide6 the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the controller. X Select Route Settings. X Select Avoid Options. X Select Avoid Area. The "Avoid area" list appears.

Activating/deactivating the blocked area: X To select an area: turn and press the controller. Switch blocking on O or off .

Displaying/changing the area: X To select an area: turn the controller. X Slide9 the controller. X To select Display/Change: press the controller. The map with the crosshair appears.

X Press the controller. The area currently blocked is displayed as a red square.

X To move to a different area to block: slide1,4,2 the controller. X To resize the blocked area: press the controller.

128 Map functions Na

vi ga tio

n

X Turn the controller. The size of the blocked area changes.

X To accept changes: press the controller. A message appears stating that the area has been set.

Deleting an area: X To select an area: turn the controller. X Slide9 the controller. X Select Delete. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the area.

X Select Yes or No. After selecting Yes, the area is deleted.

Deleting all areas: X Slide9 and press the controller while the list is shown. X Select Delete All. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete all areas.

X Select Yes or No. After selecting Yes, all areas are deleted. i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touch- pad (Y page 30).

SIRIUS XM service

Displaying SIRIUS XM service informa- tion You can display the SIRIUS XM service infor- mation. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show the menu: press the controller. X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select SIRIUS Service. The window on the right half of the display shows the telephone number of the pro- vider (SIRIUS XM) and the serial number of your service module.

i Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touchpad (Y page 30).

Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic report service X Call the provider telephone number shown on the COMAND display. i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM Radio website at http://www.sirius.com (USA).

Once the connection has been established: X Follow the service employee's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes.

If registration is not included when purchas- ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

Map functions 129

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Updating the digital map

Introduction The digital maps generated by the map soft- ware become outdated in the same way as conventional road maps. Optimal route guid- ance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with the most up-to- date map software. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the dig- ital map updated there using a data medium, or you can update it yourself.

Navigation functions

Calling up the navigation system menu

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show the menu: slide5 the control- ler. Navi is highlighted in themain function bar.

X Press the controller. The navigation menu appears.

X Turn the controller to display the navigation functions one after another.

X To switch to the map, turn the controller until Navigation appears and press the controller.

Calling up the online map display

Requirement: mbrace must be activated for Internet access (Y page 173). X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 130). X Turn the controller until Online Map Dis play is brought to the front.

X Press the controller. The online connection is established. Once the connection is established, the Google Maps map appears around the current vehicle position. i Equipment with touchpad: alternatively you can call up this function using the touchpad (Y page 30).

X Change the map scale and move the map. X To exit the online map display: press the % button.

Calling up the compass display

X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 130). X Turn the controller until Compass is brought to the front.

130 Navigation functions Na

vi ga tio

n

X Press the controller. The compass display provides the following information: RThe current direction of travel with direc- tion angle (360 degree format) and com- pass direction RLongitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds RHeight (rounded up) above sea level RNumber of GPS satellites from which a signal can be received i Equipment with touchpad: alternatively you can call up this function using the touchpad (Y page 30).

X To exit the compass display: press the % button.

Drive Information

X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 130). X Turn the controller until Drive Informa tion is brought to the front.

X Press the controller. The Starting Drive Information. Please Wait... message appears. You will then see maps with the current vehicle position and the vicinity of the des- tination in different scales, these are auto- matically displayed one after another. If mbrace is activated for Internet access, additional information can be displayed, e.g. weather at the destination (Y page 173).

i Equipment with touchpad: alternatively you can call up this function using the touchpad (Y page 30).

X To exit Drive Information: press the con- troller.

X Press the% button.

Info on navigation

X Call up the navigation menu (Y page 130). X Turn the controller until Info on Naviga tion is brought to the front.

X Press the controller. The Digital Operator's Manual about the topic of navigation is opened. i Equipment with touchpad: alternatively you can call up this function using the touchpad (Y page 30).

Navigation functions 131

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Problems with the navigation system

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

COMAND does not resume route guidance after the journey has been interrupted.

Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more than two hours. "Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle. "Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND back on and driving on. X Continue route guidance manually (Y page 109).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

COMAND is unable to determine the vehicle's position.

COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the vehicle has been transported. Example: RAfter transporting the vehicle by ferry RAfter transporting the vehicle by motorail X Start the vehicle and pull away. COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the driving situation, this may take some time. Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of the vehicle's position. When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with navigation announcements and route guidance displays.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The Navigation Unavailable Please refer to the Oper ator's Manual. mes- sage appears.

COMAND has an integrated hard drive on which the digital map is stored. To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation system will then be temporarily unavailable. X Let the vehicle and COMAND cool down to a normal tempera- ture.

X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.

132 Problems with the navigation system Na

vi ga tio

n

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

While the map is being updated from an exter- nal data medium, you see a message inform- ing you that the data medium containing the digital map is incom- patible with the vehicle software.

The datamedium containing the digitalmap cannot be used for the update. X To confirm the message: press the controller. X Remove the data medium. X Have the system database checked at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The map software update has failed.

The data medium is dirty. X Clean the data medium. X Restart the update.

The data medium is scratched. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle interior. X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down. X Restart the update.

COMAND's integrated hard disk is defective. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

COMAND asks for an activation code during the map update.

The digital map is secured with an activation code. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problems with the navigation system 133

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

134

Your COMAND equipment ................ 136 Important safety notes .................... 136 General notes .................................... 136 Telephone menu ............................... 137 Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone .................................... 138 Reception and transmission vol- ume .................................................... 142 Using the telephone ......................... 143 Phone book ........................................ 147 Call lists ............................................. 151 Speed dial lists .................................. 154 Messages (text messages and e- mails) ................................................. 155 Address book .................................... 162

135

Te le ph on e

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

If you make a call on your mobile phone while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only use the mobile phone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdic- tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. There is scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risks posed by electromag- netic fields. You can reduce this risk by using an exterior antenna.

Therefore, connect your mobile communica- tions equipment to the vehicle's exterior antenna wherever possible.

General notes

Telephony A Bluetooth interface is available for teleph- ony. If your mobile phone supports the Bluetooth profile PBAP (PhoneBookAccessProfile), the contacts are automatically displayed in COMAND. If your mobile phone does not sup- port the Bluetooth profile PBAP, COMAND will attempt to display the contacts using alternative methods. You can use the message function if your mobile phone supports the MAP Bluetooth profile (Message Access Profile). With a suitablemobile phone, you can use the hands-free system and receive vCards via the Bluetooth interface. You can obtain more information about suit- able mobile phones on the Internet at www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com. You can also obtain more information by call- ing. In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Call disconnectionwhile the vehicle is in motion A call may be disconnected if: Rthere is insufficient network coverage in certain areas. Ryou move from one transmitter/receiver area (cell) into another and no channels are free. Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible with the network available.

136 General notes Te le ph on e

Operating options You can operate the telephone by: Rusing the controller: turning sliding1 or4 pressing Rusing the6 or~ button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel Rusing the Voice Control System (see the separate Voice Control System operating instructions)

Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and illustrations in this section refer to COMAND.

Function restrictions You may have to wait before using telephony via COMAND in the following situations: Rwhen the mobile phone is switched off Rif Bluetooth is switched off on the mobile phone Rif the mobile phone has not logged on to a mobile phone network Rif the Bluetooth function is switched off in COMAND

The telephone automatically tries to log on to a network. If no network is available, you may not be able to make a "911" emergency call. If you attempt to make an outgoing call, the No Service message will appear for a short while.

"911" emergency call The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to make a 911 emergency call: Ra valid and operational SIM card is inserted in the mobile phone Rthe mobile phone is switched on Rthe PIN has been entered in the mobile phone

Ra mobile phone network is available Rthemobile phone is connected toCOMAND via Bluetooth

If you cannot make an emergency call, you must arrange rescue measures yourself. To make an emergency call: X Enter the number on COMAND (Y page 143).

X Press6. The telephone makes the connection.

X Wait until the emergency call center answers and describe the emergency sit- uation.

Telephone menu

: Mobile phone network provider ; Signal strength of the mobile phone net-

work = Receiver icon or ? Telephone menu character bar A Bluetooth device name of the currently

connected mobile phone B To enter characters using the touchpad (if

available) C To display the phone book Symbols: to= andA are not shown until after a mobile phone has been connected to COMAND. The symbols depend on your mobile phone and yourmobile phone network provider. Further information on connecting a mobile phone (Y page 138).

Telephone menu 137

Te le ph on e

Z

Symbol; shows the current signal strength of the mobile phone network. If all bars are filled, you have optimum reception. If no bars are shown, reception is either very poor or there is none at all. i Receiver icon shows whether a call is active/being connected or not.

Calling up the telephone menu: X Press %. Showing the menu bar: X Slide6 the controller. If the mobile phone connected supports the MAP Bluetooth profile (Message Access Profile), the 1 menu item is available. Fur- ther information on text messages and e-mail (Y page 155). If you have an unread text message or e-mail, the 0 mail symbol is displayed in the sta- tus bar. The symbol disappears once you have read the text message or e-mail. The symbol is displayed as soon as the message memory on the connected mobile phone is full. The symbol disappears once you delete at least one message.

Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone

Prerequisites For telephony via the Bluetooth interface, you require a Bluetooth-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. On COMAND X Activate Bluetooth (Y page 51). On the mobile phone X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN when prompted to do so (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions).

X Activate Bluetooth and, if necessary, Bluetooth visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

This visibility is for restricted periods of time on somemobile phones (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions).

X Set the Bluetooth device name for the mobile phone if necessary.

The device names for all of one manufactur- er's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify yourmobile phone, change the device name (see the manufac- turer's operating instructions). The name can be freely selected. If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth pro- files, the following information will be trans- mitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RMessages The battery of the mobile phone should always be kept sufficiently charged in order to prevent malfunctions.

i Not all mobile phones available on the market are equally suitable. You can obtain more detailed information about suitable mobile phones and about the connection between the mobile phone and COMAND on the Internet at www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com. You can also obtain more information by calling. In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength) depend on the supported version of the Hands-Free Profile.

138 Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone Te le ph on e

Procedure and general information Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) Before using your mobile phone with COMAND for the first time, you will need to search for the phone (Y page 139) and then authorize it (Y page 140). Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place bymeans of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. COMAND automatically enables the procedure suited to your mobile phone. You can recognize Secure Simple Pair- ing by a code which is displayed in COMAND and on the mobile phone. You can recognize the passkey system by the fact that you have to enter a code on the mobile phone and in COMAND. The mobile phone is always con- nected automatically after authorization. If COMAND does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone. You can also start the search procedure and authorization on the mobile phone (Y page 141). Device-specific information on authorizing and connecting Bluetooth-capable mobile phones can be obtained from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or via the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connect. You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones. Only one mobile phone can be connected to COMAND at any one time. De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile phone The connection is terminated automatically if you leave the receiver range of COMAND or deactivate Bluetooth on your mobile phone. If you no longer want the Bluetooth connec- tion to be established automatically, the mobile phone must be de-authorized (discon- nected) (Y page 142).

Searching for a mobile phone

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Connect Device: turn the con- troller and press to confirm. The device list is displayed.

X To select Search for Phones: turn and press the controller. A message is displayed that Bluetooth must be activated on the mobile phone and must be made visible to other devices.

X To select Start Search : press the con- troller. The available mobile phones are displayed in the device list.

The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth telephones within range and their characteristics. If a new phone is found, it appears in the device list with the symbol. You can now authorize (connect) the mobile phone found (Y page 140). If the device list is already full, you will be requested to de-authorize a mobile phone (Y page 142). When you call up the device list again, de- authorized devices will be removed from the list. To update the device list, start the search again.

Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone 139

Te le ph on e

Z

Symbols in the device list

Sym- bol

Explanation

New mobile phone found, not yet authorized.

Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected.

# Mobile phone is authorized and connected.

Authorizing a mobile phone (connect- ing)

Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing If COMANDhas found yourmobile phone, you can authorize (connect) it. X To select a mobile phone from the device list: turn the controller and press to con- firm. A code is displayed in COMAND and on the mobile phone.

The code is the same X COMAND: select Yes. X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depend- ing on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm the connection to COMAND and for the PBAP and MAP Blue- tooth profiles. The prompt to confirmmay take up to twominutes to be displayed. You may also save the confirmation on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The mobile phone is now authorized and connected to COMAND. You can now speak using the hands-free system.

To ensure an optimum language quality, you can set the mobile phone's transmission and reception volume (Y page 142).

The code is different X COMAND: select No. The process is canceled. Repeat the authorization.

Authorization via passkey entry (access code) If COMANDhas found yourmobile phone, you can authorize (connect) it. X To select a mobile phone from the device list: turn the controller and press to con- firm. The input menu for the passkey is dis- played. The passkey is a one- to sixteen-digit num- ber combination which you can choose yourself.

X COMAND: enter the passkey using the character bar.

X Select once all the numbers have been entered.

X Mobile phone: enter the same passkey and confirm your entry. Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to con- firm the connection toCOMANDand for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed. Youmay also save the confirmation on the mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions). The mobile phone is now authorized and connected to COMAND. You can now speak using the hands-free system.

To ensure an optimum language quality, you can set the mobile phone's transmission and reception volume (Y page 142). If the Authorization Failed message appears, you may have entered a different passkey or exceeded the prescribed time limit. Repeat the procedure.

i Some mobile phones require a passkey with four or more digits.

140 Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone Te le ph on e

i If you wish to re-authorize the mobile phone after de-authorizing it, you can choose another passkey for it.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authori- zation in COMAND and on the mobile phone (Y page 142). Subsequent authori- zation may otherwise fail.

Establishing the connection from the mobile phone The Bluetooth device name of COMAND is "MB Bluetooth". X COMAND: call up the telephone menu. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Connect Device: turn the con- troller and press to confirm. The device list is displayed.

X To select Connect via Phone: turn and press the controller. A message is displayed, stating that you can start the search on your mobile phone.

X Mobile phone: start the search for a Blue- tooth device (see manufacturer's operat- ing instructions). COMAND is displayed with the name "MB Bluetooth" in the mobile phone's device list.

X Select "MB Bluetooth". The following prompt appears in the COMAND display Do you want Device_name to be authorized?

X COMAND: select Yes. If No is selected, the procedure is canceled. If your mobile phone supports Secure Sim- ple Pairing, a code is now displayed on both devices.

The code is the same X COMAND: select Yes. X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depend- ing on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm the connection to COMAND and for the PBAP and MAP Blue-

tooth profiles. The prompt to confirmmay take up to twominutes to be displayed. You may also save the confirmation on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The mobile phone is now authorized and connected to COMAND. You can now speak using the hands-free system. To ensure an optimum language quality, you can set the mobile phone's transmis- sion and reception volume (Y page 142).

The code is different X COMAND: select No. The process is canceled. Repeat the pro- cedure.

If your mobile phone does not support Secure Simple Pairing, an input menu is displayed for the passkey. The passkey is a one- to sixteen- digit number combination which you can choose yourself. Enter the same passkey on both COMAND and the mobile phone and confirm. Depending on the mobile phone used, youmay have to confirm the connection to COMAND and for the PBAP and MAP Blue- tooth profiles.

Reconnecting automatically COMAND always searches for the last con- nected mobile phone. If no connection can be made to the most recently connectedmobile phone, the system searches for the mobile phone that was con- nected before that one.

Switching between mobile phones If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone 141

Te le ph on e

Z

X To select Connect Device: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed.

X To select the desired mobile phone: turn and press the controller. The selected mobile phone is searched for and connected if it is within Bluetooth range and if Bluetooth is activated.

Only one mobile phone can be connected at any one time. The currently connectedmobile phone is indicated by the # dot in the device list.

i You can only switch to another authorized mobile phone if you are not currently mak- ing a call.

De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile phone Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de- authorization in COMAND and on the mobile phone. Subsequent authorization may other- wise fail. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Connect Device: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed.

X To highlight the desiredmobile phone in the device list: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Deauthorize: turn and press the controller. A prompt appears, asking whether you really wish to de-authorize this device.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The mobile phone is de-authorized.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone, you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Blue- tooth list.

Displaying connection details X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Connect Device: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired mobile phone: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown: RBluetooth device name RBluetooth address Ravailability status (shown after a new search) Rauthorization status

X To close the detailed display: slide9 the controller.

Reception and transmission volume

Once the mobile phone has been authorized, you can optimize the transmission and recep- tion volume settings. To find out about the best possible settings for your mobile phone, visit www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com. You can also obtain more information by call- ing. In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

142 Reception and transmission volume Te le ph on e

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Connect Device: turn and press the controller.

X To highlight the desiredmobile phone in the device list: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Reception Volume or Trans mission Volume: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select a volume setting: turn the con- troller.

X To accept changes: press the controller.

i Incorrect settings may have an impact on the quality of calls.

Using the telephone

Accepting a call X To select Accept: press the controller. or X Press6 on the multifunction steering wheel. The call is accepted.

Additional functions available during a call (Y page 145). Adjusting the call volume (Y page 142). Further information about ending a call (Y page 147).

i You can also accept the call by voice com- mand using the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions).

i If the phone number of the caller is trans- ferred, it appears in the display. If the phone number is saved in the phone book, the contact's name is also displayed. If the phone number is not transferred, Unknown is shown in the display.

Rejecting a call X To select Reject: turn the controller and press to confirm.

or X Press~ on the multifunction steering wheel.

Making a call

Using the telephone menu X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To select all numbers one after the other in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller each time.

X To selectw in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The call is made.

Further information about ending a call (Y page 147).

Using the telephone keypad on the con- troller If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone keypad, you can use this function. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X Enter the digits using the telephone key- pad.

Using the telephone 143

Te le ph on e

Z

As soon as one of the buttons on the tele- phone keypad is touched, the correspond- ing button is highlighted in the display.

X To selectw in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The call is made.

Using the touchpad If your vehicle is equipped with a touchpad, you can use this function. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To selectn: turn and press the control- ler.

X Draw all the numbers on the touch-sensi- tive surface one after another.

X To selectw in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The call is made.

Further information about the touchpad (Y page 32).

Redial X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To selectw in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The list of outgoing calls is displayed. The most recently dialed number is at the top.

X To select an entry andmake a call: turn and press the controller.

Further information about ending a call (Y page 147).

Using call lists X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed: turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To select an entry andmake a call: turn and press the controller.

Further information about ending a call (Y page 147).

Using the phone book X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To select Name in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller.

X Search for a contact (Y page 148). X To make a call: press the controller. Further information about ending a call (Y page 147).

Using speed dial Option 1 X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To highlight a number from the character bar: turn the controller.

X Press the controller for longer than two seconds. The telephone menu displays the selected entry. The number is dialed.

Option 2: X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Speed Dial Preset List: turn and press the controller. The speed dial list is displayed.

X To select an entry andmake a call: turn and press the controller. The telephone menu displays the selected entry. The number is dialed.

144 Using the telephone Te le ph on e

Option 3 (with telephone keypad) X Press one of the number keys on the tele- phone keypad for longer than two seconds. The telephone menu displays the selected entry. The number is dialed.

Further information on setting up speed dial (Y page 154). Further information about ending a call (Y page 147).

Functions available during a call

Overview

: To add a call (Y page 145) ; Person you are calling = Symbol for active telephone connection ? To end a call A To switch the microphone on/off

(Y page 145) B To send DTMF tones (not possible with all

mobile phones) (Y page 146) Other functions: RAccepting a waiting call (Y page 147) RMaking a second call (Y page 145) RCall waiting (Y page 146) Availability depends on the network (only pos- sible in the GSM network) and on the Blue- tooth mobile phone.

Adding a call

: Adds a call If the mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone support the function, you can make another call during an existing call. The previously active call is held. X To select2: turn and press the controller. X Make a call: RUsing the telephone menu (Y page 143) RRedial (Y page 144) RUsing call lists (Y page 152) RUsing the phone book (Y page 143) RUsing speed dial (Y page 143)

Switching the microphone on/off This function is available in the telephone menu during an active phone call. To switch off the microphone: X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Microphone Off: turn and press the controller. If the microphone is switched off, theQ symbol and the The microphone is off. message are displayed.

To switch on the microphone: X Select Microphone On. TheQ symbol disappears. The The microphone is on. message is shown.

Using the telephone 145

Te le ph on e

Z

Sending DTMF tones This function is not supported by all mobile phones. Answering machines or other devices can be controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote query functions. X If you would like to listen to the messages on your answering machine, for example, dial the corresponding number.

Transmitting individual characters: X Once a connection has been established to the answer phone, select the desired char- acters in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller each time. Every character selected will be transmit- ted immediately.

or X Press the corresponding number button on the telephone keypad.

i You can also send DTMF tones using the Voice Control system; see the separate operating instructions.

Calls with several participants

Switching between calls (call waiting)

If you make another call, you can switch between the two calls (call waiting). This func- tion depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions). The calls aremarked 1 and 2. The active call is highlighted.

Switching between the calls: X To select1 or2: turn and press the controller.

or X Press6 on the multifunction steering wheel. The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.

Ending the active call: X To select~ in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller.

or X Press~ on the multifunction steering wheel. The other call is still on hold.

X To activate the call on hold: select Con tinue. The call on hold is activated. If you select Hang Up, the call on hold is also ended. i On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as the active call is ended.

Conference call You can interconnect active and held calls. This permits several parties to hear one another and speak with one another. This function depends on your mobile phone net- work provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

X Add a call (Y page 145). or X Answer an incoming call (Y page 147).

146 Using the telephone Te le ph on e

X To select Conference in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. The new participant is included in the con- ference call. Conference is displayed in the telephone menu.

Incoming call during an existing call (call waiting) The call waiting function depends on your mobile phone network provider and your mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, behavior when answering a call may vary (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Call waiting: if you receive a call while already in a call, amessage is shown. You also hear a tone. You can decide whether to accept or reject the call. Accepting: X To select Accept: press the controller. or X Press6 on the multifunction steering wheel. The incoming call is active, the previously active call is on hold. You can switch back and forth between both calls (call waiting) (Y page 146). This is also the case if you accept the wait- ing call using the VoiceControl System (see the separate operating instructions). i Depending on the mobile phone, you may also be able to accept the incoming call (call waiting) on your mobile phone. This function and behavior depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

Rejecting: X To select Reject: turn the controller and press to confirm.

or X Press~ on the multifunction steering wheel. The behavior after the call is rejected depends on your mobile phone and mobile phone network provider. Option 1: The originally active call is con- tinued and the incoming call is rejected. Option 2: The originally active call is ended and the incoming call is accepted. Option 3: Both calls are ended.

Ending an active call X To select= in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller.

or X Press~ on the multifunction steering wheel. The active call is ended.

Phone book

Introduction The telephone book displays the contacts from the address book which have a phone number. The mobile phone's telephone book is auto- matically displayed in COMAND after connec- tion (default setting). You can deactivate automatic calling up (Y page 167). In the telephone book, you can: RCreate new contacts (Y page 150) RAdd information to contacts (Y page 150) RSearch for contacts (Y page 148) RStore contacts (Y page 150) RDelete contacts (Y page 151) Further information on importing contacts (Y page 168).

Phone book 147

Te le ph on e

Z

When you import, save, edit or add contacts, they will be permanently saved in COMAND. These contacts will remain there even when you connect COMAND to a different mobile phone. You can view these contacts even without a mobile phone.

Calling up the phone book

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To select Name in the telephone menu: turn and press the controller. If the phone book contains contacts, they will be displayed in alphabetical order. The character bar at the bottomof the display is active. You can now search for a contact (Y page 148). Further information on the symbols shown (Y page 148).

i You can also call up the phone book using the multifunction steering wheel; see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.

Symbol overview

Sym- bol

Explanation

Contact that has been entered, edited or saved on COMAND.

\ Contact with voice tag These contacts have also been assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are available in vehicles with the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions).

Contact that was called up from a mobile phone

Contact imported from the SD memory card or USB device.

Contact imported via the Blue- tooth interface.

Searching for a contact

With the character bar

You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X To select characters: turn the controller and press to confirm. The first contact with the selected first character is highlighted in the phone book. If there are similar contacts, the next dif- ferent character is shown. For example, with contacts such as Jana and John, the

148 Phone book Te le ph on e

beginnings of the names are identical. The next different character A and O are offered for selection.

X Select the characters of the contact you are searching for one by one, pressing and con- firming with the controller each time.

X To end the search: select . The contacts in the phone book are dis- played.

X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller.

TheG symbol indicates that a contact con- tains more than one phone number. X To select a contact with theG symbol: turn the controller and press to confirm. The phone numbers are displayed. TheG symbol changes toI.

X To call a telephone number: turn and press the controller.

Back to the character bar: X Press the% button repeatedly until the character bar is displayed.

Information about character entry (Y page 36)

Using the telephone keypad on the con- troller If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone keypad, you can use this function. You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X For example, to enter the letter C: press the l number key briefly three times in suc- cession. As soon as you touch the number key, the number is highlighted in the additional dis- play area. The character appears at the bottom of the display the first time the key is pressed and shows all the available characters. It switches to the next character each time the key is pressed.

Using the touchpad If your vehicle is equipped with a touchpad, you can use this function. You determine the first letter of the contact you are looking for with the first character you enter. X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface. The first contact with the selected first character is highlighted in the phone book. Further information on handwriting recog- nition on the touchpad (Y page 32).

X Draw additional letters on the touchpad surface one after another.

X To complete the search and return to the phone book: press the touchpad.

X To select and call the contact: glide up or down and press.

Displaying the details of a contact

X To highlight a contact in the phone book: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The detailed view appears.

Closing the detailed display: X To select%: turn and press the control- ler.

Phone book 149

Te le ph on e

Z

Adding a new contact

X Slide5 the controller repeatedly in the phone book until the selection list appears.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select New: turn and press the controller. X To select a category for the number, e.g. Home: turn the controller and press to con- firm.

X To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Phone: turn the controller and press to confirm. If you have marked a number as preferred, it is shown at the top of the list.

X To select Continue: turn and press the controller. The input menu with data fields is dis- played.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

X To finish and save an entry: select . The contact is created in the phone book and in the address book.

Adding information to a contact Amaximum of five telephone numbers can be saved for one contact. X To highlight a contact in the phone book: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Add Phone No.: turn and press the controller.

X To select a category for the number, e.g. Home: turn the controller and press to con- firm.

X To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Phone: turn the controller and press to confirm. If you have marked a number as preferred, it is shown at the top of the list.

X To select Continue: turn and press the controller. The telephone number has been saved.

If five numbers are already stored for the con- tact you are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the existing numbers. If you wish to overwrite one of the phone numbers: X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. A list of the existing five phone numbers is displayed.

X To select the phone number to be overwrit- ten from the list: turn the controller and press to confirm. The entry field for the new phone number is displayed.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

If you do not wish to overwrite any of the phone numbers: X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Saving a contact Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book by different symbols (Y page 148).

150 Phone book Te le ph on e

X Search for a contact on the mobile phone d (Y page 148).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Save: turn and press the control- ler. The contact has now been saved. The con- tact is identified by the symbol in the phone book.

i Saved contacts are also displayed in the address book. Saving or editing the contact data on COMAND does not change the contacts on the mobile phone. If automatic calling up of phone contacts is activated, COMAND dis- plays the copy with the changed data.

Deleting the contact You can delete contacts that have been added, supplemented, saved or imported in COMAND. If there are one or several phone numbers saved under the contact, the contact is deleted from the phone book and the address book. If there are additional entries under the con- tact, such as a navigable destination, only the phone numbers are deleted. The contact is retained in the address book with the remain- ing entries. X To highlight a contact in the phone book: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller.

X To select Delete Contacts: turn and press the controller. A prompt appears asking whether the con- tact should be deleted.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The phone number is deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Closing the phone book X To select& from the character bar: turn the controller and press to confirm.

or X Press the% button.

Call lists

Introduction If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue- tooth profile, the call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in COMAND. If your mobile phone does not support the PBAP Bluetooth profile, COMAND will attempt to display the mobile phone call lists using alternative methods. If the mobile phone call lists cannot be displayed, COMAND generates its own call lists. These are not the same as the call lists in your mobile phone. The Call list option is not available unless a mobile phone is connected to COMAND. If the contact for an incoming call is not saved in the address book, you can use the call list to save the telephone number. You can save this telephone number as a newcontact in the address book or add it to an existing contact (Y page 152).

i If you connect a different mobile phone to COMAND, the call lists from the newmobile phone are displayed.

Call lists 151

Te le ph on e

Z

Opening the call list and selecting an entry

List of selected phone numbers (example) : Date and time (if available) ; Telephone number of the highlighted

entry and symbols (if assigned) X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed: turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To highlight an entry: turn the controller. X To make a call: press the controller. Closing the call list X To select&: slide8 and press the controller.

or X Press the% button. The list is closed.

i You can also call up the list of dialed calls by pressing the6 button when the tele- phone menu is shown. In this case, the list will only show names or phone numbers.

Displaying details from a list entry Abbreviated list entries can also be shown in full.

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed: turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The details are displayed.

X To go back to the list: slide8 the con- troller repeatedly until the list is high- lighted.

Saving a telephone number

New address book entry

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed: turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired telephone number: turn the controller.

152 Call lists Te le ph on e

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Save: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select New Entry. X Select a number category, e.g. Home. X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Phone. The selected category is marked with #. If you have marked a number as Prefer red, it is shown at the top of the list.

X Select Continue. The entry field for the name of the new con- tact is displayed. The entry field for the telephone number is filled in automatically.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

X To finish and save an entry: select . The new contact has been created.

Adding information to an address book entry X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed: turn and press the controller. The relevant list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired telephone number: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Save: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select Add Phone No.. X Select a number category, e.g. Home. X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Phone.

X Select Continue. The address book is displayed.

X Search for the desired entry (Y page 163). X Press the controller when you have finished searching. The telephone number has been saved. A maximum of five telephone numbers can be saved for one contact.

If five numbers are already stored for the con- tact you are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the existing numbers. If you wish to overwrite one of the phone numbers: X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. A list of the existing five phone numbers is displayed.

X To select the phone number to be overwrit- ten from the list: turn the controller and press to confirm. The entry is overwritten with the new tele- phone number.

If you do not wish to overwrite any of the phone numbers: X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Deleting call lists Call lists which are generated and managed by COMAND can be deleted on COMAND. You cannot delete call lists from COMAND which are displayed on a mobile phone that supports the PBAP Bluetooth profile. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X Select Delete Call Lists. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete all call lists.

Call lists 153

Te le ph on e

Z

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The call lists are deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

i If you delete these call lists from the mobile phone (see the separate mobile phone operating instructions), COMAND updates the call list display the next time it connects.

Speed dial lists

Setting up X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To call up the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List. The speed dial list is displayed.

X To highlight a memory position for the speed dial: turn the controller. If you highlight an entry that already exists in the speed dial list, this is overwrittenwith the new entry.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X Select Assign Speed Dial Preset. The phone book is displayed.

X Search for a contact (Y page 148). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The phone number has been saved as a speed dial.

Deleting

Deleting a speed dial preset X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To call up the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List. The speed dial list is displayed.

X To highlight the memory position you want to delete: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete Speed Dial Preset: turn and press the controller.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The speed dial preset has been deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Deleting all speed dial presets X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To call up the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Call Lists: turn and press the controller.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List. The speed dial list is displayed.

X To highlight the desired memory position: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete All Speed Dial Pre sets: turn and press the controller.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. All speed dials are deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

154 Speed dial lists Te le ph on e

Messages (text messages and e- mails)

General notes New messages are identified by the / symbol in the COMAND display and an audi- ble signal. Once you have read all the mes- sages, the symbol is no longer displayed. COMAND displays the 100 newest text mes- sages and e-mails. The symbol is displayed when the mobile phone's message memory is full. The symbol is no longer displayed if you delete messages.

Prerequisites To use the message functions, the connected mobile phone must support the Bluetooth MAP profile. When connecting the mobile phone, youmay have to accept the prompt for the MAP Bluetooth profile. With some mobile phones, some settings still have to be made after connecting to COMAND (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Themessages are displayed the next time you connect to COMAND. An e-mail account must be set up on the mobile phone for the e-mail function (see the manufacturers operating instructions). To read and write e-mails in COMAND, the e- mail account first needs to be configured (Y page 156). Some mobile phones with the MAP Blue- tooth profile: Ronly show new text messages. Rdo not support the deleting or editing of text messages. Rdo not support the drafts folder for text messages. Rdo not support the sending of text mes- sages. Rdo not support the e-mail function. Rdo not send messages in a locked status.

Not all mobile phones available on themarket are equally suitable. You can obtain further information about settings and supported functions of Bluetooth-capable mobile phones on the Internet at www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com. You can also obtain more information by call- ing. In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Settings

Calling up the settings menu for mes- sages

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Settings: turn and press the controller. The textmessage settings and the available e-mail accounts of the connected mobile phone will be displayed.

Messages (text messages and e-mails) 155

Te le ph on e

Z

Configuring the text messages dis- played X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 155).

X To highlight Text Message: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. Amenuwith the following options is shown. RAll Messages All the messages are displayed. RNew Messages Only the messages that are new on the mobile phone are displayed. ROff The messages are not displayed auto- matically. You can display the 100 new- est textmessages from themobile phone using the Download option in the mes- sage menu.

X To select the required option: turn and press the controller.

Configuring the e-mails displayed X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 155).

X To highlight an e-mail account: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. Amenuwith the following options is shown. RAll Messages All the messages are displayed. RNew Messages Only the messages that are new on the mobile phone are displayed. ROff The messages are not displayed auto- matically. You can display the 100 new- est textmessages from themobile phone using the Download option in the mes- sage menu.

X To select the required option: turn and press the controller.

Configuring an e-mail account X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 155).

X To select an e-mail account: turn and press the controller. The e-mail account is now configured. E- mails can now be received and sent in COMAND.

Deactivating the e-mail function X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 155).

X To select E-Mail Off: turn and press the controller. E-mail reception is deactivated.

Changing the displayed name of the e- mail account X Call up the settings menu for messages (Y page 155).

X To highlight an e-mail account: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Own E-Mail Address: turn and press the controller. The input menu for entering your own e- mail address is displayed.

Downloading messages manually X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Download: turn and press the controller.

156 Messages (text messages and e-mails) Te le ph on e

Downloading text messages and e-mails from the phone X Select From the Phone. The messages are downloaded. If you have selected Automatic Download in the e- mail settings, manual downloading is not possible.

Updating from the e-mail server by the mobile phone X Select From the E-Mail Server. The e-mails in the mobile phone are updated. This function is not supported by all mobile phones.

Reading messages

In the message menu

The message menu contains all the unread text messages and e-mails. If the correspond- ing folder is called up, the messages are dis- played sorted by text messages and e-mails. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed with the unread messages.

X To select the message: turn and press the controller. The message text is displayed.

X To close the message text: press the% button.

If you want to read messages that have already been read again, you have to call up the corresponding message folder (Y page 157).

In the message folder

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Folder: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn and press the controller. The selected folder is displayed.

X To select the message: turn and press the controller. The message is displayed.

X To scroll through the message or select phone numbers in the text: turn the con- troller. The display scrolls up or down line by line, or skips to the next or previous telephone number and automatically highlights it.

X To return to the list: press%.

Messages (text messages and e-mails) 157

Te le ph on e

Z

The following sub-folders can be selected for text messages and e-mails: RInbox This folder contains all the incoming mes- sages. ROutbox This folder contains all the outgoing mes- sages. RDrafts This folder contains all the messages that you have saved as a draft.

i Folders cannot be selected if they are empty.

Depending on the mobile phone used, the sub-folder function may be available.

Read-aloud function for messages X To start the read-aloud function: press the controller when the message is displayed.

X To select Read Aloud: turn and press the controller. COMAND reads out the message.

X To cancel the read-aloud function: press the8 button.

or X Press the controller, select Cancel Read- Aloud Function and press the controller again.

You can set the language (Y page 52) and the speed (Y page 48) of the read-aloud function.

Displaying details and phone numbers COMAND can also show a shortened sender display in full. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Folder: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn and press the controller. The selected folder is displayed.

X To highlight the desired message: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The detailed view appears.

X To close the detailed display: slide8 the controller.

X To return to the telephone menu: press the k button.

Writing text messages

Writing a new text message

Observe the requirements for the message function (Y page 155). X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

158 Messages (text messages and e-mails) Te le ph on e

X To select New: turn and press the controller. X To select Text Message: turn and press the controller. The text message input menu is displayed. The To: input line is selected.

Entering a recipient X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

or X To enter a phone number from the phone book: select the symbol. The contacts from the address book which have a phone number are displayed.

X Search for and select an entry (Y page 148). The number is copied to the recipient line.

Entering text and sending text messages X To select an input line for text: select5 in the character bar.

X Enter characters. COMAND contains templates which you can use to compile your messages (Y page 160).

X To send the text message: select OK. Answering a text message Observe the requirements for the message function (Y page 155). X Display the message (Y page 157). X Press the controller. X To select Reply: turn and press the con- troller. The text message input menu is displayed. The addressee's details are automatically filled in using the details in the original message.

Writing e-mails

Writing new e-mail

Observe the requirements for the message function (Y page 155). X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select1: turn and press the controller. The message menu is displayed.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select New: turn and press the controller. X To select E-Mail: turn and press the con- troller. The e-mail input menu appears. The To: input line is selected.

Entering a recipient X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

or X To insert an e-mail address from the address book: select the symbol. The contacts from the address book which have an e-mail address are displayed.

X Search for and select an entry (Y page 148). The e-mail address is copied to the addres- see line.

Messages (text messages and e-mails) 159

Te le ph on e

Z

Entering the subject X To select the Subject: input line: select 5 in the character bar.

X Enter characters. Entering text and sending e-mails X To select an input line for text: select5 in the character bar.

X Enter characters. COMAND contains templates which you can use to compile your messages (Y page 160).

X To send the e-mail: select OK. Answering an e-mail Observe the requirements for the message function (Y page 155). X Display the message (Y page 157). X To call up a menu: press the controller. X To select Reply: turn and press the con- troller. The e-mail input menu appears. The addressee's details are automatically filled in using the details in the original message.

When replying to an e-mail, you can also select Reply to All instead of Reply. In this case, the reply is sent not just to the sender but to all thosewho received the originalmes- sage.

Forwarding e-mail Observe the requirements for the message function (Y page 155). X Display the message (Y page 157). X To call up a menu: press the controller. X To select Forward: turn and press the con- troller. The input menu appears. The subject line is automatically filled in with the same details as those in the original message.

Text templates

Using text templates

: Displays text templates X Select the input line for a text message (Y page 158) or e-mail (Y page 159).

X To select text templates: in the character bar: turn and press the controller. The text templates are displayed.

X To select and insert a text template: turn and press the controller. The text template is inserted into the text message or e-mail.

Editing text templates

: Displays text templates X Select the input line for a text message (Y page 158) or e-mail (Y page 159).

X To select text templates: in the character bar: turn and press the controller. The text templates are displayed.

X To highlight the text template to be edited: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller.

160 Messages (text messages and e-mails) Te le ph on e

X To select Edit: turn and press the control- ler. The text template is displayed in an input line.

X Edit the text template as desired. Further information on character entry using the controller (Y page 36). Alternatively, depending on the vehicle equipment, you can enter characters using the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32).

X To adopt changes to the text template, select : turn and press the controller. The text template has been changed.

Calling a text message sender X Display the message (Y page 157). X To call up a menu: press the controller. X To select Call Sender: turn and press the controller. The call is made.

Using a phone number in the text Numbers in text messages that are high- lighted can be used. X To select a usable telephone number while the message is displayed: turn the control- ler.

X To select Use : press the controller. X To select Call Number: turn and press the controller. The call is made.

i It is possible that a highlighted numerical sequence may not contain a telephone number.

i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no." functions to save this telephone number or to add it to an existing entry.

Storing a sender as a new entry in the address book

Storing the sender of a text message X To call up the menu when a text message is displayed: press the controller.

X To select Save Number: turn and press the controller.

X To select New Entry: turn and press the controller.

X Select a number category, e.g. Home. X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Phone.

X Select Continue. The input line for the name of the new con- tact is displayed. The input line for the tele- phone number is filled in automatically.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

X To finish the entry: select OK. The new contact has been created.

Saving the sender of an e-mail X To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis- played: press the controller.

X To select Save Sender's E-Mail Address: turn and press the controller.

X To select New Entry: turn and press the controller. The input line for the name of the new con- tact is displayed. The input line for the e- mail address is filled in automatically.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

X To finish the entry: select OK. The new contact has been created.

Messages (text messages and e-mails) 161

Te le ph on e

Z

Adding the sender to an address book entry

Storing the sender of a text message X To call up the menu when a text message is displayed: press the controller.

X To select Save Number: turn and press the controller.

X To select Add Phone No.: turn and press the controller.

X To select a category for the number, e.g. Home: turn the controller and press to con- firm.

X To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Phone: turn the controller and press to confirm.

X To select Continue: turn and press the controller. The address book is displayed.

X Search for the desired entry (Y page 163). X Press the controller when you have finished searching. The telephone number has been added. A maximum of five telephone numbers can be saved for one contact.

Saving the sender of an e-mail Up to two e-mail addresses can be saved for one contact. X To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis- played: press the controller.

X To select Save Sender's E-Mail Address: turn and press the controller.

X To select Add: turn and press the controller. The address book is displayed.

X Search for the desired entry (Y page 163). X Press the controller when you have finished searching. The e-mail address has been added.

Deleting messages X Call up the message folder (Y page 157). X To select the message: turn and press the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The message is deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

i This delete function is not supported by all mobile phones. The Delete failed.mes- sage then appears.

Address book

Introduction Always pay attention to traffic conditions. Familiarize yourself with the address book functions before beginning your journey. You can use COMAND when the road and traffic conditions permit. You could otherwise become involved in an accident in which you or others could be injured. The address book displays all the contacts from the various sources (mobile phone, memory card, USB device, COMAND phone book, navigation). You can use the contacts to make telephone calls, navigate and to write messages. If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND and automatic calling up is activated (Y page 167), the mobile phone's contacts are displayed in the address book. If you dis- connect the mobile phone from COMAND, these contacts are no longer displayed in the address book. When you import, save, edit or add contacts, they will be saved in COMAND. These con- tacts will remain there even when you con- nect COMAND to a different mobile phone.

162 Address book Te le ph on e

You can view these contacts even without a mobile phone.

i The address book can store a total of 5000 contacts. R2000 entries are reserved for perma- nently saved contacts. R3000 entries are reserved for contacts that you can load from themobile phone.

i Before selling your vehicle, delete the contacts saved in COMAND using the reset function (Y page 55).

Calling up the address book X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select Tel: turn the controller and press to confirm.

X To select Address Book: turn and press the controller.

X To browse in the address book: turn the controller.

An address book entry can also include a pic- ture. This is shown to the left of the address data. Address book entries with pictures can only be created by importing vCards (vcf files). Further information on importing vCards (Y page 168). The quality of the pic- ture depends on the picture's resolution.

Searching for a contact

With the character bar X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Search: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select characters: turn the controller and press to confirm. The first contact with the selected first character is highlighted in the address book. If there are similar contacts, the next different character is shown. For example, with contacts such as Jana and John, the beginnings of the names are identical. The next different character A and O are offered for selection.

X Select the characters of the contact you are searching for one by one, pressing and con- firming with the controller each time.

X To end the search: select . The contacts in the address book are dis- played.

X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller.

Back to the character bar X Press the% button repeatedly until the character bar is displayed.

Information about character entry (Y page 36)

Using the touchpad If your vehicle is equipped with a touchpad you can use this function. X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To switch to the menu bar: glide down. X Select Search. X Draw the letter on the touchpad surface. The first contact with the selected first character is highlighted in the address book.

Address book 163

Te le ph on e

Z

Further information on handwriting recog- nition on the touchpad (Y page 32).

X Draw additional letters on the touchpad surface one after another.

X To complete the search and return to the phone book: press the touchpad.

X To select and call the contact: glide up or down and press.

Adding a new contact You can enter address data directly into the address book. If you store telephone num- bers in the COMAND phone book, these are also saved in the address book. If you store a navigation destination, COMAND creates an address book entry which includes the com- plete navigable address data. X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select New: turn and press the controller. The surname and first name input lines are displayed.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

X To save the surname and first name: select . The details for the contact are displayed.

X To add the desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail Address): turn and press the controller. Depending on the type of entry, the corre- sponding input menu appears.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

X To finish and save an entry: select .

Displaying contact details

X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

The entries can be categorized as follows: \ Business details 6 Home details

i An address book entry can contain the following information: Rname Rfirst name Rcompany Rup to five telephone numbers Rtwo email addresses RInternet address Rtwo addresses Rtwo navigation addresses (transferred from navigation(Y page 85)) Rgeo-coordinates

Adding information to a contact X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To add a desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail Address): turn and press the controller. Depending on the type of entry, the corre- sponding input menu appears.

164 Address book Te le ph on e

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36), the telephone keypad or the touchpad (Y page 32), depending on the vehicle's equipment.

X To finish and save an entry: select . Amaximum of five telephone numbers can be saved for one contact.

Starting route guidance to an address or geo-coordinates If an address with a ZIP code is saved, the address can be used for route guidance. If the ZIP code cannot be assigned to an exact address, you can adjust the destination sub- sequently using the controller. X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To select the address or geocoordinates: turn and press the controller. The navigation menu is displayed.

X To select Start: slide6 and press the controller. The route to the destination address is cal- culated and route guidance starts.

Making a call X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To select a telephone number: turn and press the controller. The number is dialed. Further information about the functions during a call (Y page 145).

Sending text messages X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the telephone number: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Send Text Message: turn and press the controller. The entry fields for a text message are dis- played (Y page 158).

Observe the requirements for the message function (Y page 155).

Sending e-mail X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select an entry: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To select an e-mail address: turn and press the controller. The entry fields for an e-mail are displayed (Y page 159).

Observe the requirements for the message function (Y page 155).

Displaying sub-entry information X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select an entry: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The display is shown in full.

X To close the detailed display: press the % button.

Address book 165

Te le ph on e

Z

Editing a contact

X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Edit: turn and press the control- ler. The entry field for the selected entry is dis- played.

Information about character entry (Y page 36).

Changing the category of an entry X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select an entry: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the desired entry: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Change Category: turn and press the controller.

X To select a category: turn the controller and press to confirm.

Storing the phone number as a speed dial number X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select an entry: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To highlight the desired telephone number: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Speed Dial: turn and press the controller.

X To select Assign Speed Dial Preset: turn and press the controller.

X To select a memory position for the speed dial: turn and press the controller. The phone number has been saved as a speed dial.

Voice tags

Introduction You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instruc- tions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to an address book entry, you can call up this entry with a voice command and dial a phone number, for example. You can add one voice tag per address book entry.

Adding or changing a voice tag X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X Search for an address book entry with or without a voice tag (Y page 163).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the controller.

X To select Add or Modify: turn and press the controller. Subsequent operation is voice-controlled. The Voice Control System guides you through the dialogs.

166 Address book Te le ph on e

Deleting a voice tag X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag (Y page 163).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the controller.

X To select Delete: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The voice tag is deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Listening to a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag (Y page 163).

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the controller.

X To select Voice Tag: turn and press the controller.

X To select Listen: turn and press the con- troller. You hear the voice tag.

Changing the display and sorting cri- teria for contacts X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Display and Sorting: turn and press the controller.

You have the following options: RLast Name, First Name (default setting) The contacts are sorted by surname and displayed with a comma. RLast Name First Name

The contacts are sorted by surname and displayed without a comma. RFirst Name Last Name The contacts are sorted by first name and displayed without a comma.

X To select the required option: turn and press the controller. The contacts are sorted and displayed according to the selection.

Automatically importing contacts from the phone Depending on the mobile phone used, you can set whether the contacts should be called up automatically after the mobile phone is connected to COMAND. X Connect a mobile phone (Y page 138). X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To show the menu bar: slide6 the con- troller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Autom. Download Cont. from Phone: turn and press the controller. You can allow O or suppress the auto- matic download.

Saving a contact Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book by different symbols (Y page 148). X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X To select a contact: turn and press the con- troller. The details for the contact are displayed.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Save: turn and press the control- ler. The contact has now been saved.

i If the saved address book entry contains a phone number, the entry is also displayed in the phone book.

Address book 167

Te le ph on e

Z

Saving or editing the contact data on COMAND does not change the contacts on the mobile phone. If automatic download- ing of phone contacts is activated, COMAND displays the copy with the changed data. To add additional data, such as additional phone numbers or e-mail addresses, select this contact. In this way, you avoid creating additional copies of the mobile phone entry.

Deleting the contact X Call up the address book (Y page 163). X Search for a contact (Y page 163). X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete Entry: turn and press the controller.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The contact is deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Importing contacts

Information and requirements Contacts can be imported as vCards (vcf files). A vCard is an electronic business card. A memory card, USB device or a Bluetooth connection can be used for importing.

i Up to 2000 entries can be imported into the address book. A message notifies you when the maximum number is reached. In order to be able to then import new con- tacts, you have to delete existing contacts (Y page 168).

Source Prerequisites

Memory card The SD memory card is inserted. It contains importable contact details.

USB device The USB device is inserted into the USB port. It con- tains importable contact details.

Bluetooth connection

If the sending of vCards is supported via Bluetooth, vCards can be received on mobile phones or net- books, for example. Bluetooth must be acti- vated in COMAND and on the respective device (see the manufacturer's operat- ing instructions).

Importing from thememory card orUSB device Contacts imported from the memory card or from a USB device are identified by the symbol. The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to import vCards: RvCards (vcf files)may be located in themain directory or in folders. COMAND allows you to select the relevant folders directly. RvCards must have the file extension ".vcf".

i COMAND supports vCards in versions 2.1 and 3.0.

X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone menu or the address book: slide6 the controller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

168 Address book Te le ph on e

X To select Download Contacts: turn and press the controller.

X To select From Memory Card or From USB device: turn and press the controller.

Receiving vCards via Bluetooth

COMAND X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone menu or the address book: slide6 the controller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Download Contacts: turn and press the controller.

X To select From Bluetooth Device: turn and press the controller. If COMAND is connected to a mobile phone, the connection is terminated. vCards can now be received by a device (PC, mobile phone) via Bluetooth.

External device X Start the data transfer (see the operating instructions for the device). The number of vCards received is displayed in COMAND.

COMAND X To end reception: press the controller or the% button. If a mobile phone was connected, the con- nection to the mobile phone is established again.

Received vCards are identified by the symbol in the address book.

i If you switch to another main function, e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the reception of vCards will be terminated.

Deleting imported contacts X To change to the menu bar when in the address book or the telephone menu: slide 6 the controller.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Delete Contacts: turn and press the controller.

X Select one of the following options: RInternal Contacts RImported from Storage Device RImported from BT Devices RDownloaded from Phone Turn and press the controller.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The contacts are deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled. i If automatic calling up of the contacts is deactivated (Y page 167), the Down loaded from Phone option is available.

Closing the address book X Press the % button one or more times.

Address book 169

Te le ph on e

Z

170

Your COMAND equipment ................ 172 Important safety notes .................... 172 General notes .................................... 172 Conditions for access ....................... 173 Setting up an Internet connection .. 173 Establishing/ending the connec- tion ..................................................... 178 Google local search ....................... 179 Destination/route download ........... 181 Weather forecast .............................. 185 Further Mercedes-Benz Apps ........... 187 Internet radio .................................... 188 Web browser ..................................... 190

171

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

If you make a call on your mobile phone while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only use the mobile phone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdic- tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. There is scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risks posed by electromag- netic fields. You can reduce this risk by using an exterior antenna.

Therefore, connect your mobile communica- tions equipment to the vehicle's exterior antenna wherever possible.

General notes

Connection difficulties while the vehi- cle is in motion The connection may be lost if: Rthe mobile phone network coverage is insufficient Rthe vehicle has moved into a mobile phone cell with no free channels Rthe SIM card used is not compatible with the network available

Function restrictions Youwill not be able to use theMercedes-Benz Apps and Internet connection, or will no lon- ger be able to use them, or may have to wait before using them, in the following situations: Rwhen the mobile phone is switched off. Rif your mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access. Rif the Bluetooth function is switched off on COMAND and the desired phone is sup- posed to be connected via Bluetooth. Rif the Bluetooth function is switched off on the mobile phone and the phone is sup- posed to be connected via Bluetooth. Rif the mobile phone is not connected via USB and the phone is supposed to be con- nected via USB. Rif neither themobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a phone and an Internet connection. Rif the mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access via Bluetooth and/or USB.

The driver is not permitted to call up websites while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz Apps is restricted.

172 General notes On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

i It is possible that you may not be able to receive calls when an Internet connection is active. This depends on themobile phone and the mobile phone network used.

Conditions for access

USA: to use Mercedes-Benz apps and Inter- net access, mbrace must be activated and operational. Furthermore, mbrace must be activated for Mercedes-Benz apps and Inter- net access. Take note of the connection pri- orities. An emergency call has the highest pri- ority. When a service call, e.g. a breakdown service call or the MB Info Call, is active, an emergency call can still be initiated. A service call, on the other hand, has priority over a current Internet connection. Therefore, you cannot establish an Internet connection dur- ing a service call. Canada: a mobile phone must be connected via Bluetooth (Y page 138) or USB (Y page 235) with COMAND. Furthermore, you need a valid mobile service contract with a data option, which is used to calculate the associated connection costs. Conditions for a Bluetooth connection RThe mobile phone supports at least one of the Bluetooth profiles DUN (Dial-Up Networking) or PAN (Personal Area Network). The Bluetooth profiles DUN and PAN ena- ble the Internet connection of the mobile phone to be made available to the system.

Conditions for a USB connection RThe mobile phone supports at least one of the USB classes: - RNDIS (Remote Network Driver Inter- face Specification)

- CDC/NCM (Network Control Model) - CDC/ECM (Ethernet Control Model) - CDC/ACM (Access Control Model)

The USB classes enable the mobile phone Internet connection to bemade available to the system.

The terms of use are shown when the system is used for the first time and then once a year thereafter. Only read and accept the terms of use when the vehicle is stationary. The driver is not permitted to call up websites while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz Apps is restricted.

i The availability of individual Mercedes- Benz Apps may vary depending on the country.

Setting up an Internet connection

Procedure and general information USA: to use Mercedes-Benz apps and Inter- net access, mbrace must be activated and operational. Furthermore, mbrace must be activated for Mercedes-Benz apps and Inter- net access. No further settings are required. Canada: in order to set up a mobile phone for Internet access, the mobile phone must be connected via Bluetooth (Y page 138) or USB (Y page 215) with COMAND. If you are using Internet access for the first time, you must enable the connected mobile phone for Internet access (Y page 174). If the con- nected mobile phone supports the Blue- tooth PAN profile or the USB classes RNDIS, CDC/NCM or CDC/ECM, you do not need to make additional settings. The Internet con- nection is established. If the connected mobile phone does not support the named Bluetooth profile or the named USB classes, predefined (Y page 174) or manual access data (Y page 175) must be set.

Setting up an Internet connection 173

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Enabling the mobile phone for Inter- net access

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Settings: turn and press the controller.

X To select Configure Internet Set tings: turn and press the controller. A message is displayed telling you that the settings for the Internet functions depend on yourmobile phone network provider and your mobile phone. If a mobile phone has already been ena- bled, the device list is displayed.

X To select Start Search: turn and press the controller. Mobile phones are displayed that: Rare connected with COMAND Rfulfill the conditions for the Internet func- tions Rhave not yet been set up for the Internet function

X To select a mobile phone from the device list: turn the controller and press to con- firm. If the mobile phone supports the Blue- tooth PAN profile or the USB classes RNDIS, CDC/NCM or CDC/ECM, Internet access is set up. You can use the Internet functions. If the connected mobile phone does not support the named Bluetooth profile or the named USB classes, predefined (Y page 174) or manual access data (Y page 175) must be set.

Setting access data of the mobile phone network provider

Selecting the predefined access data of the mobile phone network provider

X To select Predefined Settings: turn and press the controller. A list of countries appears.

X To select Confirm Settings: turn and press the controller.

174 Setting up an Internet connection On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

If the data is not correct, you can edit the settings (Y page 177).

If the mobile phone network provider pro- vides multiple access data options, the rele- vant access data still has to be selected. This depends on the data package used, for exam- ple. The access data for the mobile phone net- work provider is selected once for the mobile phone connected and is loaded again each time the mobile phone is connected. Estab- lishing a connection (Y page 178). You must set the access data of the mobile phone network provider who provides the SIM card and the associated data package (access settings) for the connected mobile phone. The access data remains the same when you are in a different country (roaming). The access data of another network is not selected.

Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider

X To select Manual Settings: turn and press the controller. An overview of the provider settings appears.

X Set access data (Y page 175). X To confirm settings: select Confirm Set tings by turning and pressing the control- ler.

The access data for the mobile phone net- work provider is selected once for the mobile phone connected and is loaded again each

time the mobile phone is connected. Estab- lishing a connection (Y page 178). You must set the access data of the mobile phone network provider who provides the SIM card and the associated data package (access settings) for the connected mobile phone. The access data remains the same when you are in a different country (roaming). The access data of another network is not selected.

Setting access data

Set the access data in accordance with your data package. You can contact your mobile phone network provider to obtain the precise access data. Selecting PDP Type X To select PDP Type: from the list of pro- vider settings: turn and press the control- ler.

X To select the desired setting: turn and press the controller.

Searching by phone number X Select Phone Number: in the list of pro- vider settings. An input menu appears.

X Enter the telephone number. X To confirm the entry: select OK.

Setting up an Internet connection 175

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Entering the user ID X Select User ID: in the list of provider set- tings. An input menu appears.

X Enter the user ID. X To confirm the entry: select OK. Entering a password X Select Password: in the list of provider settings. An input menu appears.

X Enter the password. X To confirm the entry: select OK. Explanation of the access data

Input field Meaning

Phone Num ber:

Access number for estab- lishing the connection The access number depends on the mobile phone used. For GSM/ UMTS mobile phones, *99***1# is used as a standard.

Access Point Name:

APNnetwork access point (Access Point Name) You can obtain this infor- mation from your mobile phone network provider. Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers and mobile phones.

PDP Type: Internet protocol used. You can obtain this infor- mation from your mobile phone network provider.

Input field Meaning

User ID: The user identification can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider. Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers.

Password: The password can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider. Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers.

Auto DNS: Automatic allocation of DNS servers is activated. If the function is deacti- vated, the DNS server addresses must be entered manually. DNS (Domain Name Service)

DNS1: DNS2:

Fields for entering the DNS server addresses manually. The address can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider.

Managing existing access data

Calling up the device list

176 Setting up an Internet connection On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Settings: turn and press the controller.

X To select Configure Internet Set tings: turn and press the controller. The device list is displayed.

Editing the access data

The mobile phone must be connected with the system for the access data to be changed. When the Internet connection is active, you cannot edit or delete the access data of the currently set mobile phone network provider. X Call up the device list (Y page 176). X To highlight the desiredmobile phone in the device list: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Change Configuration: turn and press the controller.

X Select Predefined Settings or Manual Settings. The provider settings are displayed.

In order to edit the access data of the mobile phone network provider you have two options: ROption 1: select the predefined access data of the mobile phone network provider (Y page 174). ROption 2: manually set the access data of the mobile phone network provider (Y page 175).

Canceling Internet access permissions for a mobile phone X Call up the device list (Y page 176). X To highlight the desiredmobile phone in the device list: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Delete Configuration: turn and press the controller. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the Internet configuration.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The Internet access permission for the mobile phone is now canceled. The mobile phone can now no longer be used by the system for Internet functions.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Changing the device nameof themobile phone X Call up the device list (Y page 176). X To highlight the desiredmobile phone in the device list: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X Select Change Internet Device Name. A character entry appears.

X Enter name and confirm with . The device name is changed.

Setting up an Internet connection 177

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Setting automatic disconnection of the Internet connection If a preset time has elapsed during which the Internet functions have not been used, the Internet automatically disconnects. X Call up the device list (Y page 176). X To highlight the desiredmobile phone in the device list: turn the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Disconnect When Inactive: turn and press the controller.

X To select 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes, 20 Minutes or Never: turn and press the con- troller.

Establishing/ending the connection

Establishing the connection Read the conditions for establishing a con- nection (Y page 173). A connection can be established by: Rentering a web address (Y page 190) Rcalling up the Mercedes-Benz mobile web- site. (Y page 187) Rcalling up a Mercedes-Benz app. (Y page 187) Rcalling up a favorite. Rcalling up the Internet radio (Y page 189) Restablishing an Internet connection via a wireless networking device. The "Allow shared WiFi usage" option must be acti- vated on COMAND for this (Y page 49).

Ending the connection X Press Cancel in the connections window.

Connection status

: Display of existing connection and signal strength of the mobile phone network

In most cases, the current connection status is then shown in the status bar when you switch to another main function.

Detailed connection status X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select Settings: turn and press the controller.

X To select Connection Status: turn and press the controller. The following information is displayed: Rthe volume of transferred data Rconnection status Rthe device name of the mobile phone

Ending the connection USA: you cannot cancel the connection your- self. The Internet connection is automatically terminated if the system does not recognize

178 Establishing/ending the connection On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

any user input within a five-minute time period. Canada: X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide6 the controller.

X To select the scissors symbol: turn and press the controller.

If the mobile phone Internet connection is canceled, COMAND tries to reconnect. You should therefore always close the connection on COMAND.

Google local search

Calling up Local Search

You do not need a Google account to use Local Search. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller.

X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller.

X To select Google Local Search: turn and press the controller.

Further information on how to enter the search position and search term (Y page 179).

i You will first need to register COMAND before you can use the Internet functions. To do so, you have to enter your name and postal address once in the vehicle and con- firm the general terms and conditions.

Entering a search position and search term

It is only possible for the driver to enter a search term when the vehicle is stationary. The following options are available for Local Search: RAt the current location Searches for destinations near the current vehicle position RIn the Vicinity of the Destination You can search for destinations in the vicin- ity of the destination if route guidance is active. RAt another location Searches for destinations near the location

Google local search 179

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

i You can also select a destination from the general search history.

X To select the required option: turn and press the controller.

X To select Enter search term: turn and press the controller. The input menu for the search term is dis- played.

X To complete the entry and start the search, selecta: turn and press the controller. The search results are displayed. i Google determines how the search results are sorted; this is not necessarily based on the shortest distance.

Further information on how to make use of a search result (Y page 180).

Using search results X To select a search result: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

Displaying details X Select Details. The address of the selected entry is dis- played.

Using a search result as a destination X Select Set as Destination. The navigation is called up. You can use the search result as the destination for route calculation. i At the same time the search result is stored in the "Last destinations" memory. You can take the destination from this memory and save it permanently in the contacts.

Calling a destination X Select Call. The telephone menu is called up and a call is activated. i If there is no phone number available, the menu item cannot be selected.

Calling up Google Street View X Select Google Street View. The Google Street View view is called up. i If no Google Street View information is available, a corresponding message appears.

Calling up Panoramio by Google X Select Panoramio by Google. Panoramio by Google is called up. You see pictures of places worth seeing in the vicinity of the search result.

Popular searches

You can use this function if search queries have already been carried out. If the vehicle is stationary, the search results can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel Adler". X Call up Local Search (Y page 179). X To select the search position, e.g. At cur rent location: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Popular searches: turn and press the controller. The most frequent search queries are dis- played.

Search history You can use this function if search queries have already been carried out.

180 Google local search On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

If the vehicle is stationary, the search results can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel Adler". X Call up Local Search (Y page 179). X To select a search position, e.g. At cur rent location: turn and press the con- troller.

X To select Search history: turn and press the controller. The most recent search queries are dis- played.

Local Search settings

Calling up settings

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller.

X To select Google Local Search: turn and press the controller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. The current settings are displayed.

Setting the search radius X Call up Local Search settings (Y page 181). X To select Search radius: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To select the desired entry: turn and press the controller. The selected setting is accepted.

Exiting a menu X Select&.

Resetting last location searches X Call up Local Search settings (Y page 181). X To select Reset last location searches: turn the controller and press to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the last location searches should be deleted.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The search queries are deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Deleting search queries X Call up Local Search settings (Y page 181). X To select Delete all searches: turn the controller and press to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to delete the last search quer- ies.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The last search queries are deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Destination/route download

Prerequisites To download navigation locations you need a Google account and your vehicle identifica-

Destination/route download 181

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

tion number. Further information about the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 184). To download navigation locations, the mbrace system must be: Ractivated Roperational Ractivated for the services of the system and for Internet access

For information on the mbrace system, see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.

Procedure and general information Sign into your Google account on the Inter- net. Use the Google Maps website to send the destination to a server (Y page 182). Using the Download POIApp, the destination is displayed in the vehicle (Y page 182). The destination can be: Rimported (Y page 183) Rused for route guidance (Y page 183) Rcalled up (Y page 183) Rdeleted from the server (Y page 184)

Sending destinations to the server X Sign into your Google account. X Call up the Google Maps website. X Enter a destination. X Click "More" at the destination. X Click "Send". X Enter the corresponding information in the boxes shown.

X Select "Send to car". X Select Mercedes-Benz as the vehicle brand.

X Enter the mbrace e-mail address or the vehicle identification number. Further information about the vehicle iden- tification number (Y page 184).

X Click "Send". The destination is sent to the server.

The availability of the destination/route download function is country-dependent.

Displaying destinations in the vehicle

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller.

X To select Download POI: turn and press the controller. Available destinations are shown in the list.

X To select and download a destination: turn and press the controller.

X To exit destination download: select Close. Further information on how to use the desti- nation for route guidance (Y page 183). Further information on importing the desti- nation (Y page 183). Further information on deleting the destina- tion (Y page 184). You can save up to 50 destinations for your vehicle on the server and display these in the list. If you send further destinations to the server, the oldest entries are deleted from the list.

182 Destination/route download On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Using destinations

Displaying details

X Display the destination in the vehicle (Y page 182).

X To highlight a destination: turn the control- ler.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The destination address is shown.

Using a destination for route guidance

X Display the destination in the vehicle (Y page 182).

X To highlight a destination: turn the control- ler.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Set as Destination: turn and press the controller. You then switch to navigation mode and can start route calculation. The destination is entered in the list of last destinations.

Calling up the destination

You can use the function if: Ra mobile phone is connected (Y page 138) Rthe destination address contains a tele- phone number

X Display the destination in the vehicle (Y page 182).

X To highlight a destination: turn the control- ler.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X Select Call. You then switch to the telephone function and make the call (Y page 143).

Importing destinations

You can save destinations and routes on an SD card when importing. X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 215). X Display the destination in the vehicle (Y page 182).

X To highlight a destination: turn the control- ler.

Destination/route download 183

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X Select Import. The entry is saved on the SD card.

Deleting a destination from the server

Destinations on the server are automatically deleted after seven days. X Display the destination in the vehicle (Y page 182).

X To highlight a destination: turn the control- ler.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X Select Delete. A prompt appears asking whether the des- tination should be deleted.

X To select Yes: turn and press the controller. The phone number is deleted.

or X To select No: turn and press the controller. The process is canceled.

Displaying the vehicle identification number (VIN)

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller.

X To highlight Download POI: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. The vehicle identification number is dis- played.

Exiting a menu X Press the% button. Further information on replacing the vehicle identification numberwith your email address (Y page 184).

Changing the vehicle identification number (VIN)

You can replace the given vehicle identifica- tion number with your email address. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller.

184 Destination/route download On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller.

X To highlight Download POI: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select ID: turn and press the controller. The vehicle identification number is dis- played.

X Enter an e-mail address. X Select after entry. An e-mail will be sent to your e-mail address shortly afterwards. You must confirm it within 48 hours. Otherwise, your previous vehicle ID will continue to be used.

X To confirm the changed vehicle ID: check the mailbox of your e-mail address and fol- low the link in the e-mail.

Exiting a menu X Press the% button.

Deleting destinations automatically after importing to the server Destinations on the server are automatically deleted after seven days. X Select theOptionsmenu for the Download POI App (Y page 188). The menu shows the current settings.

X To select Delete after importing to the server: turn and press the controller. Switch the setting on O or off .

Exiting a menu X Press the% button.

Weather forecast

Introduction You can call up the weather forecasts for a location of your choice. The weather forecast can be displayed in an information chart for the current day or as a 5-day forecast. Alter- natively, the weather forecast can be dis- played in a weather map.

Calling up the weather forecast X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller.

X Select Weather.

Information chart overview X Call up the weather forecast (Y page 185). The following information is displayed: Rthe time when the weather report was updated Rthe current temperature Rinformation on the weather (e.g. cloudy, rain) Rthe maximum daytime temperature Rthe minimum daytime temperature Rthe probability of rain Rthe forecast for the current day (three time intervals)

Weather forecast 185

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Switching to the 5-day forecast X To select Current: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select 5-Day. The information chart displays the forecast for the next five days in the currently selected location.

Returning to the current weather X Select 5-Day. A menu appears.

X Select Current. The information chart shows the current forecast at the currently selected location.

Displaying detailed information X Select Current. A menu appears.

X Select Info. The information chart shows detailed infor- mation for the selected area.

Selecting a location from the informa- tion chart X Call up the weather forecast (Y page 185). X To select Location in the menu: turn and press the controller. Amenuwith the following options is shown. RCurrent Position RNear Destination You can select Near Destination if the route has been calculated. The menu item is otherwise grayed out. ROther City

X To select the required option: turn and press the controller. If Current Position or Near Destina tion has been selected, the weather fore- cast for the selected option is displayed. If Other City has been selected, you need to make more entries.

Selecting another location X Enter the search area. The information chart with the weather forecast appears when the search area has been entered.

Weather map overview Calling up the weather map X Call up the weather forecast (Y page 185). The information chart is displayed (default setting).

X To select Map: turn and press the controller. The weather map is displayed.

Moving the weather map X Slide1,4 or2 the controller. The weather map is shifted in the corre- sponding direction.

Changing the scale X Turn the controller. i The data is downloaded again from the server for these functions. This can delay the display of the weather map.

Displaying the information chart for the selected location X To call up a menu: press the controller. X To select Weather Table: turn and press the controller. The information chart displays the current weather for the selected location.

Memory functions

Saving a location You can save locations that are called up fre- quently in ten preset positions (0, 1 9). X Select a location from the information chart (Y page 186)

X To select Location in the menu: turn and press the controller.

186 Weather forecast On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X Select Presets. X To select a preset and save a location: turn and press the controller. When the location is saved, the number of the selected preset comes before the name of the place in the caption.

Displaying a saved location X To select Location in the information chart: turn and press the controller.

X Select Presets. X Select desired preset. The information chart appears and displays the weather information.

Further Mercedes-Benz Apps

General notes To be able to use Mercedes-Benz Apps, you first have to register. To do so, you have to enter your name and postal address once in the vehicle and confirm the general terms and conditions. A message to this effect appears the first time you call up the online and Inter- net functions. For individual Mercedes-Benz Apps, it may be necessary to pay license fees before using. Use is then limited to a certain period of time. License fees must be paid again for use beyond this time period.

Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website

Connecting to the Internet: (Y page 178)

The online functions contain the Mercedes- BenzMobileWebsite as a predefined favorite. X Press the % button. The last function called up appears.

X Select TEL/ in the main function bar by sliding5 , turning and pressing the con- troller. A menu appears.

X To select Internet: turn the controller and press to confirm. The menu for the Internet functions appears.

X Select the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Web site menu. The Mercedes-Benz home page appears. i You cannot delete the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website menu.

Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps

You can call up additional Mercedes-Benz Apps such as Facebook, Google Street View, Google Panoramio or country traffic regulations (e.g. maximum speed) here. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

Further Mercedes-Benz Apps 187

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller. The available Mercedes-Benz Apps are displayed.

X To select the desired App: turn and press the controller.

Additional Mercedes-Benz Apps can be pur- chased on the Mercedes-Benz website. You can find further information under: http:// apps.mercedes-benz.com/apps/ The available features are country-depend- ent.

Closing Mercedes-Benz Apps X Press the% button. The Internet menu appears.

or X Press the% button for longer than two seconds. The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu or the Internet menu appears.

Adjusting the settings of individual Apps X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller.

X To highlight the desired app: turn the con- troller.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. The current app settings are displayed.

Resetting adjustments With the reset function, all Mercedes-Benz Apps settings are reset to the factory set- tings. X To call up the telephone menu: press the

% button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and press the controller. The available Mercedes-Benz Apps are displayed.

X To selectG: slide9 the controller. X To select Reset: turn and press the con- troller. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to reset.

X SelectYes or No. If you select Yes the settings are reset. If you select No the process is canceled.

Internet radio

General notes A good Internet connection is required for error-free audio data transmission. Connect- ing your mobile phone to the vehicle's exte- rior antenna via the phone bracket ensures the best possible reception.

i Bear in mind that a relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using Internet radio. An average 128kbit per sec- ond data transfer rate can transfer 56MBof data in one hour. The data transfer rate of a station is dis- played while receiving data.

188 Internet radio On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Calling up the Internet radio

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet Radio: turn and press the controller. The Internet radio menu appears.

Searching for stations

X Call up the Internet radio (Y page 189). X To select Search in the Internet radio menu: turn and press the controller. A list with search options appears.

X Select the desired search option.

i For example, as a search option you can set an Internet radio station that is near to your navigation destination.

Connecting to a station X Search for a station (Y page 189). The connection is established automati- cally.

Establishing a connection manually: X To select; in the Internet radio menu: turn and press the controller. The connection is established.

If the connection is interrupted, the system will attempt to restore the connection auto- matically. Manually re-establishing a connection X Select; again in the Internet radio menu.

Ending data transfer: X Select in the Internet radio menu. or X Change to another audio source, for exam- ple Media.

If you change to a main function that is not an audio source, e.g. navigation, the data con- nection remains on. You can continue listen- ing to the set station. Pressing the % but- ton takes you back to Internet radio.

Internet radio 189

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Saving a station as a favorite X Call up the Internet radio (Y page 189). X To select Favorites: turn and press the controller.

X Select Save ... as Favorite. The set station is saved as a favorite.

Further options

X Call up the Internet radio (Y page 189). X To select: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears. You can load station logos, select a stream or automatic play- back on starting, for example.

X To select Show station logos: turn and press the controller. The function is activated O or deactivated .

X Select Automatic playback on start. The function is activated O or deactivated .

Sound settings X Call up the Internet radio (Y page 189). X To select Sound: turn and press the con- troller. The menu appears showing the last accessed sound setting.

Web browser

Calling up a website

Function restrictions Internet pages cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.

Entering a web address

X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button.

X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.

X To select TEL/: press the controller. X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is dis- played.

X To select www: turn and press the controller. An input menu for the web address is dis- played.

X Enter characters using the controller (Y page 36) or the number keypad.

X To finish entry and call up a website: select .

Selecting a web address from the list X When the character bar is displayed, slide 5 the controller.

X To select the desiredweb address: turn and press the controller. The web address can still be changed as desired.

X To call up a website: select . The website is called up.

190 Web browser On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Navigating the website

Action Result

X Turn the control- ler.

Navigates from one selectable item (e.g. link, text field or menu) to the next and highlights the respective element on the website.

Sliding the control- ler: X Left or right 1

X Up or down4 X Diagonally2

Moves the pointer on the page.

X Press the control- ler.

Opens the selected item.

X Press%. Calls up the menu.

Menu functions

: Closes the browser ; Goes back/forward = Refreshes/cancels ? URL entry A Favorites B Closes the window C Options

X To show the menu: press the% but- ton.

X To call up the Options menu: select 3: turn and press the controller.

X To close the website: select&. X To call up the previous website: select t.

X To call up the next website: selectu. X To refresh the website: select. The website is refreshed. This procedure may take some time. i While the website is loading, a cross appears in the menu. This can be used to cancel the loading procedure.

X To enter a URL: selectg. X Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 190). X Favorites: selectf. X To close the active window: selecth.

Options menu

Opening in a new window

In order to be able to use this function, the cursor must be on a link. X To show the menu: press the% but- ton.

X To select3: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select Open in new window. The website is opened in a new window.

Web browser 191

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Adding to bookmarks Adds the current website to the favorites. The website can then be called up using themenu. You can store up to 20 favorites in the menu. X To show the menu: press the% but- ton.

X To select3: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select Add to Bookmarks. X Select Save As Global Bookmark or Save As Local Bookmark. The message: The website was added to bookmarks appears.

Current URL X To show the menu: press the% but- ton.

X To select3: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select Current URL. The URL appears.

Zoom You can use this function to enlarge web pages. X To show the menu: press the% but- ton.

X To select3: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Zoom. X To navigate on the web page: slide1, 4 or2 the controller.

X To zoom in on the web page: turn the con- troller.

Jumping from link to link You can use this function to skip from one link to the next on a website.

X To show the menu: press the% but- ton.

X To select3: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Jump From Link To Link. If a website has been called up and the controller is turned, the cursor jumps from link to link.

Directional scrolling You can use this function to scroll up and down on the web page. X To show the menu: press the% but- ton.

X To select3: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Directional Scrolling. If a website has been called up and the controller is turned, the cursor moves up or down depending on the direction of the turn.

Settings

Settings overview

192 Web browser On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X To show the menu: press the% but- ton.

X To select3: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears.

X Select Settings. You can activate/deactivate the following settings: RDownload Images Automatically It may take some time to download the contents of websites that contain a large amount of images. Therefore, it may be useful to deactivate this option. RBlock Pop-Ups Pop-ups are windows (usually with adver- tisements) which are displayed automati- cally when you call up a website. You can block these displays. RActivate Javascript Javascript makes it possible to display and interact with dynamic content on the web- site. RAllow Cookies Some websites save information in small text files (cookies) in your system. You can determine whether cookies may be stored. REnable Internet Audio You can switch the browser's audio play- back on or off here. RHide Scroll Bars You can show or hide the scroll bar here. RShow Link Target You can display the link's URL here. RCharacter Size You can select the font size which is used when displaying the website. RCharacter Code You can select a different character set here, e.g. if the characters of a website appear distorted.

Changing settings X To select the desired setting: turn and press the controller. Switch the setting on O or off .

Changing the character size or character code. X Select Character Size or Character Code.

X To select the setting you require: turn and press the controller.

i If you change the settings, the websites may not be displayed correctly.

Deleting private data

X Press the % button. X Select Internet. X To show themenu: slide6 the controller. X To select Settings: slide6 the control- ler, turn and press to confirm. A menu appears.

X To select Delete Private Data: turn and press the controller. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X To select the setting you require: turn and press the controller.

or X Select Delete All Data On Exit. Switch the setting on O or off .

Web browser 193

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Option Function

All Deletes all private data.

Cache Deletes data in the cache.

Cookies Deletes cookies that are created by web- sites which you have called up.

URL History Deletes all websites visited (path).

O Delete All Data On Exit

If this function is activated O, all pri- vate data is deleted when you exit the Internet browser.

i If you reset COMAND to the factory set- tings (reset function), these data and set- tings are deleted (Y page 55).

Favorites

Introduction Favorites/bookmarks are frequently visited websites.

Creating favorites Adding a favorite in the menu X Press the % button. The last function called up appears.

X Select TEL/ in the main function bar by sliding5, turning and pressing the con- troller. A menu appears.

X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu for the Internet functions appears.

X Select www. X Enter the web address (URL) and name using the character bar and press .

Adding to favorites X To call up themenu: press the% button. X To select3: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select Add to Bookmarks(Y page 192).

Selecting favorites X Press the % button. The last function called up appears.

X Select TEL/ in the main function bar by sliding5, turning and pressing the con- troller. A menu appears.

X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu for the Internet functions appears.

X To select the Internet Favoritesmenu: turn and press the controller. The Favorites menu appears.

X Select the desired bookmark. The favorite is opened in a new window.

Editing favorites X Press the % button. The last function called up appears.

X Select TEL/ in the main function bar by sliding5, turning and pressing the con- troller. A menu appears.

X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu for the Internet functions appears.

X To select the Internet Favoritesmenu: turn and press the controller. The Favorites menu appears.

194 Web browser On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X To bring the desired favorites to the front. X To select Edit: slide6 and press the controller. An input menu appears.

X Enter the web address (URL) and name using the character bar.

Deleting favorites X Press the % button. The last function called up appears.

X Select TEL/ in the main function bar by sliding5, turning and pressing the con- troller. A menu appears.

X To select Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu for the Internet functions appears.

X To select the Internet Favoritesmenu: turn and press the controller. The Favorites menu appears.

X Select the desired favorites. X Select Delete. A prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes the favorite is deleted. If you select No the process is canceled.

Closing the Internet browser X Select% in the browser menu (Y page 191)

or X Press the% button for longer than two seconds. A prompt appears, asking whether you want to close the Internet browser.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes the application is closed. If you select No the process is canceled.

Web browser 195

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

196

Radio mode ........................................ 198 Satellite radio .................................... 202

197

Ra di o

Radio mode

Radio overview X To activate the main function and menu bar: in radio mode, slide ZV the controller.

: Main function bar ; Status bar with compass display = Main display field with available stations and relevant information ? Display of radio station selected A Radio menu bar B Climate control status bar C Context display with additional information

Radio menu overview Radio main function bar RHD FM Radio: HD FM radio mode RHD AM Radio: HD/MW radio mode RSat Radio: satellite radio RRadio Station Presets: 99 preset posi- tions for radio stations RInfo on Radio: Digital Operator's Manual RIP Radio: Internet radio Radio menu bar "Options" RTag This Track: saves track information on an Apple device for a later purchase option via iTunes RDirect Entry: manual frequency entry RCurrent Station/Channel Listing: list of available stations

RStart Application at Other Seat: starts radio at a different seat REdit List: selects and edits station pre- sets RShow Station Information: switches artist and track display and station name on/off RHD Radio: switches HD radio on/off Radio menu bar R: searches for stations by name RWaveband: selects radio wavebands RInfo: displays additional information about the current station (radio text) RSound: sound settings, Burmester sound

198 Radio mode Ra di o

Switching on HD FM or HD AM radio mode Button activation X Press the $ button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband.

Setting the waveband

Button activation

X Press the $ button. A menu appears with a selection of HD FM Radio, HD AM Radio, Radio Station Presets, Info on Radio and IP Radio.

X Turn the controller until the required wave- band is in the center. Press the controller.

Using the main function bar X In radio mode: slide Z V the controller. The radio main function bar and menu bar appear. Radio is active.

X Press the controller. A menu appears with a selection of HD FM Radio, HD AM Radio, Radio Station Presets, Info on Radio and IP Radio.

X Turn the controller until the required wave- band is in the center. Press the controller.

Using the radio menu bar X In radio mode: slideV the controller. The radio main function bar and menu bar appear.

X To select Waveband: turn and press the controller. A menu appears with a selection of HD FM Radio, HD AM Radio, Radio Station Presets, Info on Radio and IP Radio.

X Turn the controller until the required wave- band is in the center. Press the controller.

Selecting a station

From the main display field

All currently available stations are displayed. X In radio mode: turn the controller until the desired station is in the center.

Using the current station list

i The station list is available in the HD AM and HD FM wavebands. It includes all sta- tions that can be received.

Radio mode 199

Ra di o

X In radio mode: press the controller. The station list appears with the stations currently available.

X To select the desired station: turn and press the controller.

Using direct entry

X In radio mode: slideV the controller. The radio menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller

X Select Direct Entry. An additional menu appears.

HD FM radio mode: X To select the HD FM Frequency option: turn and press the controller.

X Enter the frequency of the desired station in the entry field.

HD/MW radio mode: X To select the HD AM Frequency option: turn and press the controller.

X Enter the frequency of the desired station in the entry field.

Satellite radio mode X To select the SatRadio Channel option: turn and press the controller.

X Enter the frequency of the desired station in the entry field.

Station presets: X To select the Radio Station Presets option: turn and press the controller.

X Enter the station preset of the desired sta- tion.

Using the search function X In radio mode: slideV the controller. The radio menu bar appears.

X Select and enter the first letters of the required station using the controller.

X Press OK to confirm. COMAND displays a list of available sta- tions.

X To select stations from the list: turn the controller and press to confirm.

Using station presets X Quick setting: Briefly press a number key, e.g.l. The station stored in second place is set.

Switching HD Radio on/off X In radio mode: slide the controllerV. X Select Options. X By selectingO or before HD radio, you determine whether HD radio is switched on or off.

If HD radio is switched off, the system does not switch to digital radio and it is not possible to select any sub-channels.

Tagging music tracks If an Apple device is connected, the music tracks and artist displayed in the radio text can be stored. The "tag music track" function allows you to transfer the music track cur- rently playing to an Apple device and then purchase it in the iTunes store.

200 Radio mode Ra di o

X In radio mode: slideV the controller. X Select Options. X Select Tag This Track. Amessage appears in COMANDabout stor- ing the track information.

Station Information X In radio mode: slideV the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X You can determine whether or not the artist, track or station name are shown in the main display area with O or before Show Station Information.

Station list X In radio mode: press the controller. The station list appears with the stations currently available.

Saving stations i Frequencies are already stored in COMAND. There are 100 preset positions available.

Quick save X Press a number key, such asl. The sta- tion is saved to second place in the radio station presets.

Storing current stations X In radio mode: slideV the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Edit List. X Select the position of the required preset: turn the controller. This can also be a preset position that is already occupied, which is then overwritten by the current station.

X SlideVY the controller. An additional menu appears.

X To select the Save Current Station/ Channel option: turn and press the con- troller. The currently set station is stored in the selected preset position.

or X In the main display field, press and hold the controller. A list of current allocated preset positions appears.

X To select the position of the required preset and confirm: turn the controller and press.

Moving highlighted stations X In radio mode: slideV the controller. X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Edit List. X To select the required preset entry: turn the controller.

X SlideVY the controller. An additional menu appears.

X To select the Move Highlighted Sta tion/Channel option: turn and press the controller. The list of stored stations appears again.

X To move the highlighted station to the new position: turn the controller and press to confirm.

Radio mode 201

Ra di o

Deleting highlighted stations X In radio mode: slideV the controller. X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X Select Edit List. X To select the required preset entry: turn the controller.

X SlideVY the controller. X To select the Delete Highlighted Sta tion/Channel option in the additional menu: turn and press the controller.

X If you really wish to delete the highlighted station, select Yes: turn and press the con- troller. Otherwise, select No: turn and press the controller.

Calling up sound settings X In radio mode: slideV the controller. X To select Sound in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller. The sound menu appears (Y page 250).

Radio text This function is available in HD and FM/AM radio mode. Radio text is additional data, metadata or similar that, in addition to displaying the artist and track, also includes information on the current program. X To switch on radio text view: in radio mode, slideV the controller. The Radio menu bar is shown.

X To select Info: turn and press the control- ler.

With an active Info button, a larger view of the radio station set will be shown together with radio text information in place of the list of stations. The frequency is visible in the context display. X To switch on radio text plus: in radio mode, slideV the controller. The Radio menu bar is shown.

X Select Info. The display switches back to the radio sta- tion overview with radio text plus informa- tion.

Satellite radio

General notes The satellite radio mode requires satellite radio equipment and registration with a sat- ellite radio provider. Note that the categories and channels shown in the illustrations depend on the program content offered by the provider. The illustra- tions and descriptions in these operating instructions may therefore differ from the channels and categories offered by the pro- vider. SatRadio mode may be temporarily unavaila- ble or interrupted for a variety of reasons. These include environmental or topographi- cal conditions as well as other factors beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. This means operation may not be possible in cer- tain areas. These include: Rtunnels Rparking garages Rlocations inside or next to buildings Rlocations in the vicinity of other structures SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio offers more than 140 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and entertainment.

202 Satellite radio Ra di o

SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Details are available from the SIRIUS XM Service Center and at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Your new Mercedes-Benz vehicle comes with SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio pre-installed at the factory. This service is free for a six-month trial period. About a month before the trial period ends, information will be provided on how to extend this subscription. An acoustic signal sounds and a message is shown, describing how the subscription can be extended.

Registering SatRadio

: Phone number of provider ; SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver X Switch on SatRadio mode (Y page 204). The satellite radio main menu appears showing the preview channel. You cannot select any other stations.

X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Service: turn and press the con- troller. The service information screen appears.

Once the telephone connection has been established: X Follow the instructions of the service staff. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. If activation is completed suc- cessfully, the Updating Channels... message appears in the display, followed by the satellite radio main menu.

i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM Radio website at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

i If registration is not included when pur- chasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

If the satellite receiver is not installed cor- rectly, the Device Unavailable message will appear.

Satellite radio 203

Ra di o

Switching to satellite radio

: Preset ; Channel name and channel number = Channel information ? Category list A Keyword search B Options menu C Artist & track D Additional display area Channel information= can be viewed in detail (Y page 207). Additional display areaD shows the specific SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio logos of the different channels. X To select Radio in the main function bar: turn the controller and press to confirm. If satellite radio mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another radio mode is switched on, you can now switch to satellite radio mode in the carousel menu.

X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller. The message No Service appears if there is no signal.

Selecting a category Satellite radio channels are sorted into vari- ous categories. You can choose between var- ious categories such as News/Discussions, Sports and Country (if available). The cate- gory list is sorted alphabetically. The content of the categories is sorted by channel num- bers.

X To call up the category list: select Cat egory in the menu bar by turning and pressing the controller. The category list appears.

X To select a category: turn the controller and press to confirm. The category selected is shown in the dis- play. You hear the station last selected for this category. The # dot indicates the current setting.

204 Satellite radio Ra di o

The All Channels category is at the top of the category list. This category enables you to browse all available channels.

Selecting a channel

Channel search X When the display/section window is selected, slide XVY the controller. COMAND searches in both directions (ascending and descending) and stops at the next channel found in the selected cat- egory.

Entering channel numbers directly X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller. The satellite radio menu appears.

X To select Enter Channel: turn and press the controller. An input menu appears.

X For the channel number, press the corre- sponding number keys on the control panel one after the other. COMAND sets the selected channel. i You can only select currently permitted digits.

Selecting a channel via the satellite radio station list

You can select the channel using the station list displaying the artists and tracks that are currently playing.

X To select Options in the menu bar: slide V and press the controller.

X To select Current Station List with Artist & Title: turn and press the con- troller. The channel list appears.

X Select the desired channel

Keyword search

X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To enter the required search term: turn and press the controller. Direct and indirect results are shown.

X Select the required result. The relevant channel is played.

Memory functions i There are 100 presets available. X Quick store: press and hold a number key, such asl. The channel is saved to the second position in the radio channel pre- sets.

X To store a channel using the edit func- tion: select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Edit List: turn and press the controller. The list of saved channels appears.

X To select the preset: turn the controller and press for about 2 seconds. The newly saved station overwrites the existing preset.

Satellite radio 205

Ra di o

Music and sport alerts

General notes This function makes it possible to store a pro- gram alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. You can store up to 30 music and sports alerts (favorites). Music alerts can only be saved whilst a track is being played. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the chan- nels. If a match is found with a saved mes- sage, you will be informed. A window appears with the respective information.

Setting a music alert

X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Alert for Artist, Track & Sports Event: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears.

X Select Add New Alert. A window with a prompt appears.

X Select Artist or Track. The alert is set for the current artist or track.

The music alert window appears X To select Change to or Ignore: turn and press the controller. If you select Change to, the channel is changed and the favorite artist or track is played.

If you select Ignore, the current channel will continue playing.

Setting a sport alert

X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Alert for Artist, Track & Sports Event: turn and press the control- ler. A menu appears.

X Select Manage Sport Alerts. A menu appears.

X Select Select New Alerts. A menu appears.

X Select the desired team from a league, e.g. college, NBA, NHL, NFL or MLB. The alert function for the sports team is added.

Editing music and sport alerts X Select Edit Alert. A list of set sport alerts appears.

X Select Manage Music Alerts. A list of set artists and tracks (artist) appears.

Tagging music tracks The "tag music track" function allows you to transfer the music track currently playing to an Apple device and then purchase it in the iTunes store.

206 Satellite radio Ra di o

X To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X To select Tag this Track: turn and press the controller. Amessage about saving thismusic track on the Apple device appears.

Displaying information

X To select Info in the radio menu bar: turn and press the controller. Information on the currently received pro- gram is displayed.

If available, you will see: Rthe channel logo Rthe channel abbreviation Rthe artist of the track that is currently being played Rthe current track X To return to the radio display: select Info: slideV and press the controller.

Displaying service information The provider's customer service center is available by phone at any time to answer any general questions or questions on the ver- sions available. X To select Options in the menu bar: slide V and press the controller.

X To select Service: turn and press the con- troller. The provider's details appear.

X To return to the main display: press the % button.

Channel list updates During reception of a new channel list, the Updating Channels... message is shown. The station last selected is switched to mute until the update has been completed. Sat Radio mode is not available during this proc- ess. Once the update has been completed, the Sat Radio basic menu appears. The station previ- ously selected will be played if it is still avail- able.

Sound settings Information on sound settings (Y page 250).

Satellite radio 207

Ra di o

208

Your COMAND equipment ................ 210 Activating media mode .................... 210 Audio/video mode ............................ 212 Media search ..................................... 220 Media Register .................................. 223 Bluetooth audio mode .................... 228 Operationwith theMedia Interface .. 234 Audio AUX mode ............................... 237 Video AUX mode ............................... 239 Video DVD mode ............................... 240 Picture viewer ................................... 246

209

M ed ia

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Activating media mode

General notes There are several ways to activate media sources using COMAND. The relevant sections of the Operator's Man- ual describe the simplest way to activate a media source. This section describes all options for activat- ing media sources.

Using the MEDIA button X Press the button. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X To selectmedia sources: turn the controller until the desired media source is in the center. Press the controller. The media sources appear in the following order: RCD/DVD RMemory card RMedia Register RVehicles without Media Interface: USB 1 and USB 2 RVehicles with Media Interface: Media Interface 1 and Media Interface 2

RBT audio RTV (if your vehicle is equipped with a TV) RAUX If playablemusic files are found, theywill be played by COMAND.

X To display the function bars: slideV the controller.

Switching on automatically After an external media source has been con- nected, COMAND will only activate the cor- responding media mode automatically in the case of CDs and SD cards. When using USB devices, depending on the vehicle's equip- ment, the relevant Media Interface 1, 2 or USB 1, 2 basic display must already be acti- vated. External media sources: RApple devices (e.g. iPhone) RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) RCD RDVD RSD cards Rvia AUX cable (automatic activation depends on the device connected) Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth

If playable music files are found, they will be played by COMAND.

i If a media function is already switched on in COMAND, this will be interrupted and the basic display of the newly connected device will appear. If another function, such as navigation, is operating, the basic displaywill not change. Only the music from the newly connected media source will play

210 Activating media mode M ed ia

Using the main function bar

X To select Media: turn and press the con- troller. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X Select the media source. If themedia source containsmusic or video files, these will be played. The correspond- ing basic menu will be shown.

Using the number keypad

i If you touch a key in the touch-sensitive number keypad, the number field is dis- played in the additional display area.

X Touch any number key when in media mode. The number field is shown. The active media source is highlighted.

X To select a media source: press the corre- sponding number key. If themedia source containsmusic or video files, these will be played. The correspond- ing basic menu will be shown.

X To select a track from the active media source: press theg key on the number keypad. An input field appears.

X To enter a track number: use the number keypad to enter the desired numbers. The track is played.

X To show track information: press the # key on the number keypad An additional field appears with the track information.

Using the device list

X In media mode, slideV the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Devices: turn the controller and press to confirm. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source. If themedia source containsmusic or video files, these will be played. The correspond- ing basic menu will be shown.

Activating media mode 211

M ed ia

Starting an application at a different seat

X In media mode, slideV the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Start Application at Other Seat. An additionalmenu appearswith the option of switching the media source to Split View, Rear Right or Rear Left. Use Additional Options to operate the parental control screen for selected seats: (Y page 72).

X To switch the media source to, e.g. Split View: turn and press the controller (Y page 28).

Audio/video mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING Handling discs while driving may distract you from traffic conditions. You could also lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Handle discs only when the vehicle is station- ary.

Inserting and removing a disc from the single CD/DVD drive Before inserting a CD/DVD, ensure that the cup holder is empty and the spray guard flap is open. X To insert: press the button on the single drive. If there is a disc already inserted, it will be ejected.

X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards. The drive closes and the disc is played. If the CD/DVD is operated in Media mode, the corresponding basic menu will be shown. If the CD/DVD is started using another application (e.g. navigation), the display will not change. i The drive may not be able to play discs with copy protection.

X To remove: press the button. The drive ejects the disc.

X Remove the ejected disc from the slot. If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it is drawn in again automatically after a short while.

212 Audio/video mode M ed ia

Menu overview CD mode basic display

: Main function bar ; Status bar with active traffic announcements = Artist and album ? Track number/number of songs in the track list A Track display on the disc B Playback time for the current title C Climate control status bar D Media menu bar E Elapsed playback time for the current title F Graphic time display G Additional display area with cover view

Inserting discs into the DVD changer The DVD changer has a magazine with six trays. Before inserting a CD/DVD, ensure that the cup holder is empty and the spray guard flap is open. X To insert the CD/DVD into the maga- zine tray: press the V button. The magazine menu appears.

X To select the magazine tray: turn the controller and press to confirm. The DVD changer switches to the selected magazine tray. You will see the Please Wait... mes- sage.

Audio/video mode 213

M ed ia

Z

You will then see the Please insert disc Slot_number. message.

X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards.

X To load all empty magazine trays: press the V button The magazine menu appears.

X To select Load Empty Slots: slideV, turn and press controller. COMAND switches to the next empty mag- azine tray. You will see the Please Wait... mes- sage. You then see the Please insert disc message.

X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards. Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer switches to the next empty tray.

X Repeat these steps until all magazine trays are filled. The DVD changer plays the last inserted disc.

X To cancel the loading process: press the V button. or

X To select% in the magazine menu: turn and press the controller.

Ejecting discs from the DVD changer i If you remove one disc while playing another disc, the DVD changer interrupts

playback. Playback continues once the disc has been ejected.

X To eject a single CD/DVD: press theV button. The magazine menu appears. The current disc is marked.

: Type of data medium ; Active ejection = Disc name ? Empty tray no. 4 A Current disc X To select a disc: turn the controller and press to confirm. The DVD changer ejects the disc.

X Take the disc out of the slot. X To eject all CDs/DVDs: press the V button. The magazine menu appears.

X Select Eject All. The last active disc is ejected. The Please remove disc message appears.

X Remove the disc. The DVD changer ejects the disc.

X Repeat the last step until the magazine is empty.

X To exit the menu: press the V button. or

X Select% in the magazine menu.

214 Audio/video mode M ed ia

Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card

Important safety notes

G WARNING SDmemory cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of children. If an SD memory card is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention.

! If you are no longer using the SD memory card, you should remove it and take it out of the vehicle. High temperatures can dam- age the card.

COMAND supports SD memory cards (Secure Digital), SDHC memory cards (Secure Digital High Capacity), and SDXC memory cards (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity.

Inserting an SD memory card X Insert the SDmemory card into the SD card slot in the stowage space under the arm- rest until the SDmemory card engages into place. The side with the contacts must face downwards. The music is played while the files are loaded in the background. If there are no supported audio/video files, you will see a message to this effect.

Ejecting an SD memory card X Press the memory card. The memory card is ejected.

X Remove the memory card.

Connecting USB devices There are two USB ports located in the stow- age compartment in the center console.

X Connect the USB device to the USB port. The data medium will only be played and the files will only be loaded in the back- ground if the corresponding media display is visible. Otherwise, the system does not automatically switch to USB. If there are no supported audio/video files, you will see a message to this effect.

i MP3playersmust supportMedia Transfer Protocol (MTP).

Activating media mode

Switching on automatically After an external media source has been con- nected, COMAND will only activate the cor- responding media mode automatically and show the basic display in the case of CDs and SD cards. If the CD/DVD is started using another application (e.g. navigation), the dis- play will not change. When using USB devices, depending on the vehicle's equipment, the relevant Media Interface 1, 2 or USB 1, 2 basic display must already be activated. X Insert the CDs/DVDs (Y page 212) or X Insert an SD memory card: (Y page 215) or X Connect a USB device: (Y page 215) COMAND loads the medium inserted and playback starts automatically if the basic display is set to the correct USB media source.

Further options for switching on RUsing the number keypad: (Y page 211) RUsing the main function bar: (Y page 211) RUsing the device list: (Y page 211) RUsing the button: (Y page 210)

Audio/video mode 215

M ed ia

Z

Options menu

X In Media mode, slideV the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

Playing similar tracks X To select Play More Like This: turn and press the controller. COMAND automatically creates and plays a track list with similar tracks. If there are no comparable tracks on the data carrier, you will see a message to this effect.

X Select the required track.

Play mode X To select Playback Mode: turn and press the controller.

X Select Normal Track Sequence. The current track list is played in the order it appears on the data medium.

X Select Random Track List. The current track list is played in random order.

X Select Random Medium.

All tracks on the data medium are played in random order.

Skip to time X To select Skip to Time: turn and press the controller. A pop-up menu appears.

X To set the time: turn the controller or

X Set the desired time using the number key- pad.

Select active partition X To select Select Active Partition: turn and press the controller. With the Select Active Partition option, you can select a partition in the USB data medium.

Save files to Media Register i With the Save Files to Media Reg ister option, you can transfer the sup- ported audio/video/image files to the COMAND hard drive.

X To select the Save Files to Media Reg ister option: turn and press the controller. A menu appears (Y page 224).

216 Audio/video mode M ed ia

Manage Media Register X To select Manage Media Register: press the controller. The contents are shown. Using the control- ler, files and folders can be renamed or deleted. A pop-up window appears when the file is renamed. The characters are entered using the controller (Y page 36).

X To select Delete All Media Files: turn and press the controller. Files and folders can be completely deleted from the Media Register.

X Select Memory Info: important parame- ters for your COMAND hard drive are shown.

Starting an application at a different seat

The media source can be played back at a different seat: (Y page 212). Show track information

Checking or unchecking the box in front of Show Track Information displays or hides

the information on the track, artist and album in the main display field.

Stop and playback function X To stop playback: in audio/video mode, slideV the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To activate in the media menu bar: turn the controller and press to confirm Playback is interrupted here. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: in audio/video mode, slideV the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To activate in the Media menu bar: turn and press the controller. Playback is continued from the point of interruption. The symbol changes to.

Selecting a track

Selecting using the current track list X To display the current track list: press the controller in the basic display. The category list appears. Select the current track list.

X To select a track: turn the controller and press to confirm.

Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or backwards to a track: turn or briefly slide XVY the controller in the media basic display.

Selecting a track using the number key- pad X Press the key on the number keypad. A numerical entry field appears. The num- ber of positions offered corresponds to the number of tracks in the current track list. Only numbers that correspond to a track

Audio/video mode 217

M ed ia

Z

number in the current track list can be entered.

X To enter the track number using the num- ber keys: briefly press the desired numbers on the number keypad. The track plays after the last possible num- ber is entered. i Pressing and holding a number key for more than two seconds completes the entry, and the corresponding track is played.

The search menu

X In media mode, slideV the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select Search: turn and press the con- troller. The category list is shown.

X Select a category, e.g. Genres. Sub-categories appearwith the selection of the main category (depends on the COMAND default settings and the music tracks available).

X Select a sub-category, e.g. Rock.

If the Rock sub-category includes music tracks, these will be shown..

Gracenote Media Database

General notes This function is only available in audio CD mode.

There is a version of Gracenote music recognition technology, Emeryville, California, USA on the COMAND hard disk. You will recognize this by the logo in the bottom right-hand corner of certain audio displays. If the audio CD does not contain any CD text information, COMAND can use the Grace- note Media Database to identify unknown audio tracks when in audio CD mode.

Internet update of metadata The option Update metadata via Internet allows any missing metadata for an audio CD (e.g. cover, track, album, artist) to be uploaded retrospectively to the internal Gracenote database. An Internet connection is required for this (Y page 178).

218 Audio/video mode M ed ia

Selecting Internet update of metadata X In media mode, slideV the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Updating Metadata Via Inter net in the selection list. A connection with the Gracenote data server is established. The missing data is loaded, saved and displayed in the main display field. If there is no data found or there is no Inter- net connection, a corresponding errormes- sage will appear.

Switching the Gracenote data display on/off X Switch on CD mode (Y page 215). X To select Gracenote Media Database: turn and press the controller.

X To switch the display off: select None. In the basic display, Track 1, Track 2 etc. are shown instead of the Gracenote data, for example.

X To switch on the display: press the control- ler.

Notes on audio/video mode

Permissible data carriers RCD-R, CD-A and CD-RW RDVD-R, DVD-V and DVD-RW RSD memory card RUSB storage device

Permissible file systems RISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs RUDF for video DVDs RFAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS for SD memory card and USB storage media

Multisession CDs For multisession CDs, the content of the first session determines how COMAND will proc- ess the CD. COMAND plays only one session and gives priority to the audio CD session.

File structure of a data carrier When you create a disc with compressed music files, the tracks can be organized in folders. A folder may also contain subfolders. The disc may contain no more than eight directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level will not be recognized by the system.

i COMAND supports up to 50,000 files fromone datamedium. For datamediawith more than 64 GB, only files in the following folders are supported: music, pictures, vid- eos.

Track and file names When you create a disc with compressed music files, you can assign names to the tracks and folders. If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root directory itself, the root directory will also be treated as a folder. You should observe the following when assigning track names: Rtrack names must have at least one char- acter. Rtrack names must have the ending of a supported audio/video format, e.g. mp3, aac or m4v. Rthere must be a dot between the track name and the extension. Example of a correct track name: "Track1.mp3".

Permissible formats COMAND supports the following audio for- mats: RMP3 RWMA

Audio/video mode 219

M ed ia

Z

RCD-A RAAC formats: .aac, .mp4, .m4a and .m4b Copy-protected iTunes music files with the .m4p file extension are not supported. COMAND supports the following video for- mats: RDVD-V RMPEG Rwmv RM4V RAVI up to 720p

Permissible bit and sampling rates COMAND supports MP3 files of the following types: Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s to 320 kbit/s Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz COMAND supportsWMA files of the following types: Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz COMAND does not support WMA files of the following types: RDRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files Rvariable bit rate RWMA Pro R5.1 surround sound

i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least 44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a notice- able deterioration in quality. This is espe- cially the case if you have activated a sur- round sound function.

Selecting an active partition (USBmass storage devices only) You can select this function for USB storage devices when the storage device is parti- tioned. Up to 9 partitions (primary or logical, FAT, FAT32 and NTFS) are supported.

Select active partition X To select Options in the media menu bar: turn and press the controller.

X Select Select Active Partition. Notes on copyright Audio/video files that you create or repro- duce yourself for playback are generally sub- ject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you knowabout the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these.

Notes on CDs/DVDs

! COMAND is designed to play discs that complywith the EN60908 standard. There- fore, you can only use discs with a maxi- mum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they can- not be ejected and can damage the device. Only use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter.

Discs with copy protection are not compati- ble with the audio CD standard and therefore may not be able to be played by COMAND. Playback problems may occur when playing copied discs. There may be playback problems if you play CDs that you have copied yourself with a stor- age capacity of more than 700 MB.

i COMAND is able to play back audioCDs in multichannel audio format.

Media search

Starting the media search X In Media mode, slideV the controller.

220 Media search M ed ia

The media menu bar appears. X To select Search: turn and press the con- troller. The category list appears.

General information COMAND plays back files from the following data mediums: RDisc (CD/DVD Audio) RMemory card RMedia Register RUSB storage device RApple devices (folder, year and photos are not available)

The categories are displayed according to the data available.

Category list

X In media mode, slideV the controller. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select Search: turn and press the con- troller. The category list is shown.

Depending on the connected media sources and files, the following categories are listed: RCurrent Tracklist; RFolders:; RSelect By Cover; RKeyword Search; RPlaylists; RArtists;

RAlbums; RTrack; RGenres; RYear ; RComposers; RVideos; RPhotos. i The categories are available as soon as the entiremedia content has been read and analyzed. If the same device is reconnected with unchanged media content, these catego- ries are available more quickly. When connecting Apple devices, the cat- egories Folder, Year and Photos are not available.

Searching by current track list

X To select Current Tracklist in the cat- egory list: turn and press the controller. The selection list appears.

X Select the required track.

Searching by folder Playable files can be searched for in the active data medium's directories.

Media search 221

M ed ia

Z

X To select Folders: in the category list: turn and press the controller. The folder list appears.

X Select the required folder. The track list appears.

X Select the required track.

Selecting by cover

X To select Select By Cover in the category list: turn and press the controller. A menu with cover views appears. COMAND searches all media sources.

X Tomove the desired folder to the front: turn the controller. The track list appears.

X To select the desired track: turn and press the controller.

Searching by genre

X To select Genres in the category list: turn and press the controller. COMAND searches all media sources. A selection list with Genres and media sour- ces appears.

X Select the desired Genres. A selection list with music tracks from the selected genre appears.

X Select a music track. The track is played. The basic menu for the active media source is shown.

X To exit the selection list: press the% button.

Keyword search

X To select Keyword Search in the category list: turn and press the controller. The input field appears.

X To select required characters: turn and press the controller for each letter (Y page 36). Entering just part of the name of a track or artist is enough. The search result then dis- plays the entire text .

X Select . The search results are displayed. The numbers behind the results, as shown in the example Artists (2/0), mean: 2 results that contain the exact keyword searched and 0 results that are similar.

X Select one of the results. Keywords that have already been searched for are displayed in the "Search history" without having to enter them completely.

222 Media search M ed ia

They can be accepted directly and dis- played in the search result.

X Select one entry, e.g. Artists. Albums and covers (if available) are shown. COMAND searches all media sources.

X Select an album. The tracks are listed.

X Select a track. The basic display appears and playback starts.

Media Register

General notes i Keep your original music files, photos and video files in a secure location. A malfunc- tion in COMAND may result in the loss of music files stored in the MEDIA REGISTER. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.

You can storemusic files, photos or video files in the MEDIA REGISTER. The memory has a capacity of 10 GB.

Switching on the MEDIA REGISTER X Press the button. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X To select Media Register: turn the con- troller until Media Register is in the center. Press the controller. The media sources appear in the following order: RDisc; RMemory Card; RMedia Register; RUSB 1 (vehicles without Media Interface) RMedia Interface 1 (vehicles with Media Interface) RUSB 2 (vehicles without Media Interface) RMedia Interface 2 (vehicles with Media Interface) RBluetooth Audio; RAux.

Playback begins at the point last listened to. If there are no files, you will see a message to this effect. Further options for switching on: RUsing the number keypad: (Y page 211) RUsing the main function bar: (Y page 211) RUsing the device list: (Y page 211) RUsing the button: (Y page 210)

Media Register 223

M ed ia

Z

MEDIA REGISTER basic display

: Main function bar ; Artist and album = Display for the active data medium ? Display of current track in the track list A Media menu bar B Numerical time display C Graphic time display D Additional display area with cover view

Copying files to the MEDIA REGISTER

General notes You can copy photos, music files and videos from the following data mediums: RDiscs in a CD/DVD changer or a single CD/ DVD drive RSD memory card RUSB storage device RMP3

i Data can only be copied from an MP3 player if this can be configured as a mass storage device. Video files from DVD-V cannot be copied. While copying, several functions will not be available. If this is the case, you will see a message to this effect.

1. Selecting a data medium X To switch media mode on: press the button. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X To selectmedia sources: turn the controller until the desired media source is in the center. Press the controller.

X SlideV the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Save Files to Media Register. The media list appears. A data medium from which files can be copied is selected automatically. i The Save Files to Media Register function can be reached from any media application.

224 Media Register M ed ia

X Select the displayed data medium. The data medium is loaded. If the data medium contains files that can be copied, a selection menu appears.

2. Selecting files

X To select All Media Files: turn and press the controller This command copies all files from the selected data medium. The symbol next to All Media Files is filled in. All subse- quent entries have a checkmark O beside them.

X Select a folder. A checkmark O next to the folder entry highlights the selection.

X To select Continue: turn the controller and press to confirm. The copying menu appears.

3. Starting the copying process

In the example, files are copied from a USB stick to the MEDIA REGISTER. X To select Start: press the controller. i The selection of a target folder is optional. If there is no target folder given, the selected files are saved to the main direc- tory of the Media Register.

X To select Target Folder: turn and press the controller.

X Select a folder. X Select Continue. X To select Start: press the controller. The copying procedure starts and is shown in the progress bar. It may take some time for the copying proc- ess to be completed, depending on the amount of data. If there is not enoughmem- ory space, a message to this effect appears. i It is possible to change to a different func- tion (e.g. radio) during the copying proce- dure. The copying procedure continues in the background. While the copying proce- dure is taking place, this is shown by a sym- bol in the status bar.

Media Register 225

M ed ia

Z

Once the copying procedure is complete, you will hear the first track of the copied album. You can now copy more files to the MEDIA REGISTER. X To cancel copying: select Cancel. Files are stored in the MEDIA REGISTER up until the point of cancellation.

Renaming/deleting files

X To switch media mode on: press the button. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X To selectmedia sources: turn the controller until the desired media source is in the center. Press the controller.

X SlideV the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Manage Media Register. X Select Rename / Delete Files. The file list is displayed.

X To highlight the selected files: turn and press the controller.

X SlideVY the controller. You can select either Edit or Delete.

X To select Edit file: turn and press the con- troller. The following entry field appears:

X Rename the file. X To save changes with : turn and press the controller. Renaming a file only changes the name. Depending on whether or not the Show Track Information option has been selected, this change may not be seen in the main display field.

X To select Delete file: press the controller.

Deleting all files ! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not use COMAND during this time.

This function deletes all files from the MEDIA REGISTER.

226 Media Register M ed ia

X To switch media mode on: press the button. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X To selectmedia sources: turn the controller until the desired media source is in the center. Press the controller.

X SlideV the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Manage Media Register. X Select Delete All Media Files. A prompt appears. No is highlighted. If you select Yes, all files are deleted. If you select No the process is canceled.

X To select Yes or No: turn and press the con- troller. The Please Wait... message appears. The Data Deletedmessage then appears.

Calling up memory space info X To switch media mode on: press the button. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X To selectmedia sources: turn the controller until the desired media source is in the center. Press the controller.

X SlideV the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Manage Media Register.

X Select Memory Info.

Selecting a playback mode X Press the button. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X To select Media Register: turn the con- troller until Media Register is in the center. Press the controller.

X SlideV the controller. The media menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Playback Mode. The options list appears. The # dot indi- cates the current setting.

X Select the desired option. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal Track Sequence, you will

Media Register 227

M ed ia

Z

see a corresponding icon in the main dis- play.

i The Normal Track Sequence option is automatically selected when you change the disc you are currently listening to or when you select a different medium. If an option is selected, it remains selected after COMAND is switched on or off.

The following options are available: RNormal Track Sequence: the tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.). RRandom Medium: all the tracks on the medium are played in random order. RRandom Track List: the tracks in the cur- rently active track list are played in random order.

Bluetooth audio mode

Connecting Bluetooth audio devices

Prerequisites X Activate the Bluetooth function in COMAND (Y page 51).

Bluetooth audio mode requires a Blue- tooth-capable audio device. Check your Bluetooth audio device for the following (see the Bluetooth audio device's operating instructions): RBluetooth audio profile The Bluetooth audio device must support the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth audio profiles. RBluetooth visibility Certain Bluetooth audio devices do not just require activation of the Bluetooth function. In addition, your device must be made "visible" to other devices. RBluetooth device name This device name is predetermined but can usually be changed. To make a clear selec-

tion of the Bluetooth device possible, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you cus- tomize the device name (see the Blue- tooth audio device's operating instruc- tions).

i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio data transmission AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio data playback.

i The Bluetooth device must be visible for authorization. After authorization, COMAND even finds the Bluetooth device when it is not visible.

X The Bluetooth function in COMAND must be activated (Y page 51).

General notes

Before using your Bluetooth audio device with COMAND for the first time, you will need to authorize it. When you authorize a new Bluetooth audio device, it is connected automatically. Con- nection involves first searching for a Blue- tooth audio device and then authorizing it. You can authorize up to fifteen Bluetooth devices.

i If you authorize a mobile phone that sup- ports Bluetooth audio, the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth audio profiles are con- nected automatically. The mobile phone is then entered: Rin the Bluetooth telephone list (Y page 139) Rin the Bluetooth device list (Y page 229)

Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a mobile phone in Bluetooth telephony (Y page 140).

228 Bluetooth audio mode M ed ia

i If themobile phone that is connected only supports two Bluetooth profiles at the same time, COMAND functions may behave as follows: Rwhen connecting to the Internet, play- back is stopped on the Bluetooth audio device. Rwhen starting playback on the Blue- tooth audio device, the Internet con- nection is ended.

Searching for and authorizing a Blue- tooth audio device Switching to Bluetooth audio mode X Press the button. X To select Bluetooth Audio in the menu: turn and press the controller. A menu appears. If you see the No Bluetooth Audio Device Connected message, you will need to authorize the Bluetooth audio device first.

X To select Options in the Bluetooth audio menu: slideV and press the controller.

X To select Bluetooth Audio Devices: press the controller. A new menu appears.

: Bluetooth audio player within range and already authorized

; Newly detected mobile phone with Blue- tooth audio mode in range

The Bluetooth device list displays all author- ized devices, whether they are within range or not. After a device search, devices which are within range but not authorized are also dis- played. Searching for Bluetooth audio X To select Search for Audio Devices: press the controller. A display with text appears.

X Select Start Search. COMAND searches for Bluetooth audio devices within range and adds them to the Bluetooth device list. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth audio devices within range and their characteristics.

Authorizing Bluetooth audio X Select a Bluetooth audio device that has not yet been authorized from the list: turn and press the controller. Authorization starts. Depending on the Bluetooth audio device used, you now have two options for con- tinuing with authorization.

Option 1: entering the passkey X You can find information on this in the "Authorizing (registering) a mobile phone" section (Y page 140). After successful authorization, the Blue- tooth audio device is connected and starts playing.

Bluetooth audio mode 229

M ed ia

Z

Option 2: Secure Simple Pairing i The Bluetooth audio device must sup- port Bluetooth version 2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing. COMAND cre- ates a six-digit code, which is displayed on both devices that are to be connected For some Bluetooth audio devices, the pairing must be confirmed within 10 sec- onds.

X If the number code displayed on COMAND and on the Bluetooth audio device is the same, select Yes: press the controller. If you select Yes, authorization continues and the Bluetooth audio device is con- nected. Playback starts. If you select No, authorization is canceled.

External authorization If COMAND does not find your Bluetooth audio device, this may be due to particular security settings on your Bluetooth audio device. In this case, check whether your Blue- tooth audio device can locate COMAND. The Bluetooth device name for COMAND is MB Bluetooth. X Switch on Bluetooth audio mode (Y page 232).

X To select Options: slideV and press the controller.

X To select Bluetooth Audio Devices: press the controller.

X To select Connect via Audio Device: turn and press the controller.

Authorizing X Start the authorization on the Bluetooth audio device; see the operating instruc- tions of the Bluetooth audio device. After successful authorization, the Blue- tooth audio device is connected and starts playing.

With some Bluetooth audio devices, play- back must first be started on the device itself so that COMAND can play the audio files.

Reconnecting a Bluetooth audio device The Bluetooth audio profiles are connected automatically under the following circum- stances: Rone of the last two mobile phones to have been connected has also been used as a Bluetooth audio player (if this function is supported by the mobile phone). Rthe mobile phone is automatically con- nected. The Bluetooth audio player is then connected.

i For an automatic connection with COMAND, the telephone must be within range. For most Bluetooth audio devices, the "automatic connection" must be activated by checking a box. Depending on the device used, this prompt often takes place when authorizing (see the Bluetooth audio device operating instructions).

If the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con nected message appears, you have two options to reconnect the Bluetooth audio device. Option 1: X Connect Device in the basic display: press the controller. If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth audio device, it will be connected and will start playing.

230 Bluetooth audio mode M ed ia

Option 2: X To select Options: slideV and press the controller.

X To select Bluetooth Audio Devices: press the controller.

X To select a Bluetooth audio device: turn and press the controller. If the Bluetooth audio device has been authorized, playback starts.

Bluetooth audio device and simulta- neous search for mobile phones i When searching for a mobile phone or a new Bluetooth audio device, the connec- tion to an already activated Bluetooth audio device is separated (Y page 139).

In the Bluetooth audio basic display, you will see the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con nected message and the Connect Device menu item cannot be selected.

Displaying details X To select a Bluetooth audio device from the Bluetooth device list: turn the control- ler.

X To select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth audio device: slideVY the con- troller.

X To select Details: turn and press the con- troller. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown: RBluetooth name RBluetooth address Ravailability status (shown after an update) Rauthorization status

X To close the detailed display: press the % button.

De-authorizing (deregistering) a Blue- tooth audio device X To select a Bluetooth audio device from the Bluetooth device list: turn the control- ler.

X To select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth audio device: slideVY and press the controller.

X To select Deauthorize: press the control- ler. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to deauthorize this device.

X To select Yes or No: turn and press the con- troller. If you select Yes, the device will be deleted from the Bluetooth device list. If you select No the process is canceled. i Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth audio device, you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your Bluetooth audio device's Bluetooth list (see the Bluetooth audio device's operat- ing instructions).

Switching to Bluetooth audio mode

Basic display

: Audio transmission status (depending on the Bluetooth audio device, also title name and artist)

; Data medium position in the media list = Sound settings ? Device list

Bluetooth audio mode 231

M ed ia

Z

A To stop or start playback B Name of the connected Bluetooth audio

device (example) C Options menu Some mobile phones only support two Blue- tooth profiles at the same time (e.g. Hands- Free Profile for Bluetooth telephony and Bluetooth audio profile for audio streaming). If you activate Bluetooth audio mode and there is already an active Internet connection, this can cause the connection to be termi- nated.

Switching to Bluetooth Audio X Press the button. X To select Bluetooth Audio in the menu: turn and press the controller. COMAND activates the Bluetooth audio device. The basic display then appears. Playback starts.

i If the Bluetooth audio device connected supportsmetadata and corresponding data is available, then the artist, track and album name can be displayed.

Starting/stopping playback X To select Start playback: turn and press the controller. Playback starts. is selected.

X To stop playback: select. A message appears. is selected.

X To continue playback: select. A message appears. is selected.

Starting playback if the Bluetooth audio device has been stopped

During the search formobile phones, the con- nection with the Bluetooth audio device is terminated (Y page 139). In the Bluetooth audio basic display (Y page 232) you will see the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con nected message and the Connect Last Used Playermenu item cannot be selected. When the search is finished, the Bluetooth audio device can be reconnected. X To select Start playback:: slideV and press the controller. Playback resumes from the beginning.

X To select Connect Last Used Player: press the controller. Depending on the Bluetooth audio device used, playback starts immediately or you must start playback manually. In this case, you will see the Bluetooth Audio Device Paused message. i If there is an Internet connection and the mobile phone that is connected only sup- ports two Bluetooth profiles at the same

232 Bluetooth audio mode M ed ia

time, the Internet connection is inter- rupted.

i The connection to the Bluetooth audio device can also be interrupted if: Rthe connected mobile phone only sup- ports 2 Bluetooth profiles at the same time Ryou connect to the Internet using COMAND (Y page 178).

Selecting a track The function is not supported by all Blue- tooth audio devices. Some mobile phones impair function with regard to the following criteria: Rthe number of tracks that can be selected Rthe time period until the next or previous track is played

X Switch the multifunction steering wheel to themediamenu (see the vehicleOperator's Manual).

X To skip forwards or backwards to a track: briefly press the9 or: but- ton on the multifunction steering wheel.

X Rapid scroll: press and hold the9 or: button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the9 or: buttons, the rapid scrolling speed increases after a short time.

i In rapid scroll, track names are not shown, but instead only Track1, Track2 etc. The playback times for the tracks played are not displayed. This is available as an optional function starting with AVRCP Ver- sion 1.3. There is also no music search option available with Bluetooth Audio.

Selecting playback options If the Bluetooth audio device supports the corresponding function, the following options are available: RNormal Track Sequence: the tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.). Audio data playback is determined by the order in which the tracks are written to the data medium. Alphabetical order is the most common. Once all the tracks in a folder have been played, the tracks in the next folder are played. RRandom Track List: the current track list is played in random order (e.g. 3, 8, 5 etc.). RRandom Medium: all tracks on the data medium are played in random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). Playback options are optional functions and are not, or only partially, supported by Bluetooth audio devices.

Selecting playback options X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Playback Mode. A # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the desired option. If you select Random Track List, you will see a corresponding message in the dis- play/selection window.

Increasing the volume on COMAND X To select Options: slideV and press the controller.

X To select Volume: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Standard or Boost. Information on sound settings (Y page 250).

Bluetooth audio mode 233

M ed ia

Z

Information on audio AUX mode (Y page 237).

Operation with the Media Interface

Prerequisite Media Interface is a universal interface for the connection of mobile audio and video devi- ces. Media Interface in COMAND has two USB connections. The USB connection sockets are located in the stowage compartment under the armrest.

234 Operation with the Media Interface M ed ia

Media Interface basic display

: Additional display area with cover view ; Artist and album = Main function bar ? Display for the active data medium A Media menu bar B Title display in the media list C Current track/number in track list D Numerical time display E Graphic time display

Switching to Media Interface

Switching on automatically X Connect a data medium to USB port 1 or USB port 2.

X Make sure that the Media Interface 1 or Media Interface 2 basic menu is activated. If playable media files are found, they will be played by COMAND. If you remove a device, the No Device Connected message appears.

Further options for switching on RUsing the number keypad: (Y page 211) RUsing the main function bar: (Y page 211) RUsing the device list: (Y page 211) RUsing the button: (Y page 210)

Supported devices The following datamedia can be connected to COMAND via the Media Interface: RiPod RiPhone RiPad RMP3 RUSB devices

i It is not possible to run two Apple devi- ces simultaneously. Therefore the device last connected is loaded.

i iPod, iPhone and iPad are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, Cali- fornia, USA.

i Audio files, photos and video files can be played back.

Operation with the Media Interface 235

M ed ia

Z

For details and a list of supported devices, visit http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

Supported data formats

Music mp3, wma, aac

Video mpeg, wmv, mov, avi, mp4

Images jpg, jpeg, bmp, png

Selecting a music file

Selecting with the controller X To display the current track list: press the controller in the basic display. The track list for the active data medium appears.

X To select a track: turn the controller and press to confirm.

X To skip forwards or backwards to a track: turn the controller in the basic dis- play. The selected track is played.

Fast forward/rewind X With the media source active in the basic display, slide XVY the controller and hold it until the desired position has been reached.

Search function

Selecting Search using media menu bar X SlideV the controller.

The media menu bar appears. X To select Search: turn and press the con- troller. The category list appears.

Overview The following categories are listed: RCurrent Tracklist RFolder RSelect By Cover RKeyword Search RPlaylists RArtists RAlbums RTracks RGenres RYear RComposers RVideos RPhotos RPodcasts RAudiobooks i The functions are available as soon as the entire media content has been read and analyzed. If the same device is reconnected with unchanged media content, these functions are available more quickly. The audio books and podcasts categories are only available for Apple devices. When connecting Apple devices, the cat- egories Folder, Year and Photos are not available.

236 Operation with the Media Interface M ed ia

X To select a category, e.g. Current Track list: turn and press the controller. The selection list appears.

X Select the required track.

X Keyword search: using the controller, enter the characters for the desired search term and confirm. The search results are displayed according to available categories, and can then be selected. (Y page 222).

Playback options

X To select a playback option: with a media source connected, slideV the control- ler. The media menu bar is shown.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select playback options (Y page 216).

Video function If playable video files are found, they will be played by COMAND. X To switch on full-screen mode: press the controller in the basic display.

X To show the video menu: slideV the controller in full-screen mode. The Media Interface menu bar appears.

X To select Options: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Video Settings. Operate Video Settings (Y page 243)

Audio AUX mode

Notes on audio AUX mode External audio sources may have different volumes, which can mean that system mes- sages such as traffic announcements and navigation system announcements are much louder. If necessary, deactivate the system messages or adjust their volume manually. AUX also provides the option of connecting a Media Player to COMAND.

Audio AUX mode 237

M ed ia

Z

To connect an external audio source to the audio AUX, you will require an audio AUX cable.

i You will find further information online at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Cus- tomer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

Switching to audio AUX mode

X Connect an external audio source. The socket for the audio AUX jack is located in the stowage compartment in the center console. The audio AUX is not selected automati- cally.

X Press the button. The menu for the last accessed media source appears.

X To select Media from themain function bar: turn and press the controller. You will see the menu.

X Select Aux. The audio AUX menu appears. The medium is played if the audio source is switched on and playback is activated.

Please see the respective operating instruc- tions for how to operate the external audio source.

Setting the audio AUX options

X To select Options in the menu bar: slide V and press the controller. Amenu appears. You can set Mono/Stereo and Volume.

Mono/stereo: X To select Mono/Stereo: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X Select Mono or Stereo. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Volume: X To select Volume: turn and press the con- troller.

X Select Standard or Boost. Standard: the volume of the external audio source is adjusted to a standard value. Boost: the volume of the external audio source is raised by approximately 10 dB. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Traffic announcement:

A device which is connected as an external audio source may seem quieter or louder in the vehicle, or the usual maximum volume cannot be achieved. On some devices, it is possible to adjust the volume separately. In this case, start at a medium volume and increase it gradually. This enables you to determine whether the system is able to play themusic at high volumewithout distorting it.

238 Audio AUX mode M ed ia

Video AUX mode

Connecting external video sources

G WARNING External video sourcesmay have different vol- umes, which canmean that systemmessages such as traffic announcements and navigation system announcements are much louder. If necessary, please deactivate the systemmes- sages or adjust their volume manually.

Video AUX is another option for showing vid- eos using COMAND. To connect an external video source to the video AUX, you will require a video AUX cable.

i If you only use an audio AUX cable, you will only be able to hear the sound from the video being played. Videos cannot be shown on the driver's side while the vehicle is in motion.

Switching to AUX video mode X Connect the external video source. The socket for the video AUX jack is located in the stowage compartment in the center console. The video AUX is not selected automati- cally.

X Press the button. The menu for the last accessed media source appears.

X To select Media from themain function bar: turn and press the controller. You will see the menu.

X Select Aux. The AUX video menu appears.

X To select Audio/Video in the menu bar: slideV and press the controller. A Source Type Selection menu appears.

X Select Video. The # dot indicates the current setting.

If the video source is connected and play- back selected, the image from the external video source will appear if Video is selected.

Please see the corresponding device operat- ing instructions for information on how to operate the external video source. Information about sound settings (Y page 250)

Switching full-screen mode on/off

X To switch on: slide ZV the controller in video AUX mode. The menu bars disappear.

X The full-screen symbol appears: press the controller. The full screen appears.

X To switch off: press the controller. The menu is displayed.

Setting further options X To select Options in the menu bar: slide V and press the controller. A menu appears. You can adjust Video Settings, Mono/Stereo and Volume.

Video AUX mode 239

M ed ia

Z

Video settings: X Select Video Settings. X Select the preferred screen format, e.g. 16:9 or Automatic Daylight Adjust ment. The screen format is adjusted. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Mono/stereo: X To select Mono/Stereo: turn and press the controller.

X Select Mono or Stereo. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Volume: X Select Volume. X Select Standard or Boost. Standard: the volume of the external audio source is adjusted to a standard value. Boost: the volume of the external audio source is raised by approximately 10 dB. The # dot indicates the current setting.

Traffic announcement: X To select TA: turn the controller and press to confirm. You have switched traffic announcements on O or off .

Video DVD mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,

there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING Handling discs while driving may distract you from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Handle discs only when the vehicle is station- ary.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

General notes

Notes on discs

! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. They could peel off and damage COMAND. Stickers can cause the disc to bend, which can result in read errors and disc recogni- tion problems.

! COMAND is designed to play discs that complywith the EN60908 standard. There- fore, you can only use discs with a maxi- mum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they can- not be ejected and can damage the device. Only use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter.

The variety of data media, burners and burn software means there is no guarantee that the system will be able to play discs that you have copied yourself.

240 Video DVD mode M ed ia

DVD playback conditions If video DVDs do not conform to the NTSC or PAL TV standards, they may create picture, sound or other problems during playback. COMAND is capable of playing back video DVDs produced according to the following standards: RRegion code 1 or region code 0 (no region code) RPAL or NTSC standard You will generally find the relevant details either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.

i If you insert a video DVD with a different region code, a message to this effect appears.

i COMAND is set to region code 1 at the factory. This setting can be changed at an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter. It is also possible to play video DVDs with a different region code, provided that they are pro- duced in accordance with the PAL or NTSC TV standard. The region code can be changed up to five times.

Control options There are four control menus available in video DVD mode. Most DVDs have their own control menu. The DVD's control menu is operated directly using the controller or DVD functions.

Control menu and function

Operation

RDVD's control menu Selection of title, scene, language, subtitles ...

Operation with the controller

RMenu Options Selection of brightness, con- trast, color, for- mat

Operation using the menu bar/options/ video settings

Control menu and function

Operation

RVideo menu Selection of scene, fast forward/rewind

In full-screen mode, slideV the con- troller

RDVD functions Selection of title, scene, language, subtitles ...

In full-screen mode, press the controller

Function restrictions Depending on the DVD, certain functions or actionsmay not function at all. The symbolK appears in the display.

Switching to video DVD mode RInsert and eject a disc from the single drive (Y page 212) RInsert a disc into the DVD changer (Y page 213) REject a disc from the DVD changer (Y page 214)

Further options for switching on: RUse the number keypad (Y page 211) RUse the main function bar (Y page 211) RUse the device list (Y page 211) RUse the button (Y page 210)

Video DVD mode 241

M ed ia

Z

DVD overview

: Status bar ; Main function bar = Main display field ? Media menu bar A Climate control status bar B Additional display area with title, scene and time display The DVD basic display appears once the DVD has been inserted.

DVD full-screen mode Once the DVD has been inserted, the disc is played. The video will first appear in the over- view display. X To set full-screen mode: slideVZ the controller. The main function bar and menu bar are hidden. A full-screen symbol will be shown.

X Press the controller. The full-screen mode appears.

X To show the DVD basic display in full- screen mode: slideV the controller. The video menu appears.

X Press the controller. The basic display appears.

Menu options

X To select options: in full-screen mode, slideV the controller. The video menu appears.

X Press the controller. The DVD basic display appears.

X To select Options in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The Options menu appears.

242 Video DVD mode M ed ia

Skip to time X To select Skip to Time: turn and press the controller. A menu appears.

X To set the time: turn the controller. or Set the desired time using the number key- pad.

X To hide the menu: press the% button. DVD functions X To select DVD Functions: turn and press the controller. A menu appears (Y page 244).

Starting an application at a different seat

X To select Start Application at Other Seat: turn and press the controller. The menu appears: (Y page 212). i Activating the parental control screen: (Y page 72).

Video settings

Dynamic image enhancement The Dynamic Image Enhancement function automatically matches Brightness, Con trast and Color to the film being played.

X To activate or deactivate: check or uncheck the box in front of Dynamic Image Enhancement.

Manual image enhancement

In order to manually adjust the brightness, contrast and color, the Dynamic Image Enhancement function must be switched off.

X To select Brightness, Contrast or Color: turn and press the controller. A sliding menu appears.

X To select the required value: turn the con- troller.

X To exit the sliding menu: slide XV the con- troller.

X To switch the Automatic Daylight Adjustment on/off: press the controller.

Setting the picture format The following options are available for the screen format for the DVD being played: RAuto; R16:9; R4:3; RZoom. X To set the picture format: turn and press the controller. The dot before the menu entry shows the selected format.

DVD's control menu Most DVDs have their own control menu which can be operated using the controller.

Video DVD mode 243

M ed ia

Z

Showing the DVD's control menu X To select Menu from the DVD functions menu: turn and press the controller. The DVD functions menu is hidden and the DVD'smenu entries (e.g. scenes, language, trailers) are displayed.

X To select a menu entry: turn and press the controller.

Video menu

: Type of data medium ; Current title = Shows the menu bars for the DVD basic

display ? Current scene A Track time Operating the video menu X To show: in full-screen video mode, slide V the controller.

X To hide: slide ZV the controller. X To select the next/previous scene: turn the controller clockwise/counter-clockwise.

X To fast forward/rewind: slide XVY and hold the controller until the desired posi- tion has been reached.

X To hide the video menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To show the menu bars for the DVD basic display: press the controller. The video menu is hidden and the DVD basic menu appears.

DVD functions

Showing/hiding the DVD functions X To show DVD functions: in full-screen video mode, press the controller. The DVD functions menu is shown.

X To hide: To select% from the DVD functions: turn and press the controller

X To show the DVD basic display: To select from the DVD functions: turn and press the controller.

Overview of DVD functions

: Activates DVD control menu ; Hides DVD functions = Shows the DVD basic display ? Confirms entry in control menu A Navigates DVD lists B Jumps to the start of the scene C Displays camera perspectives D Shows subtitles E Selects language F Stop function G Pause function

244 Video DVD mode M ed ia

Using the DVD functions

X In full-screen mode, press the controller The DVD functions menu is shown. It is possible to navigate in the DVD's control menu when the arrows in the upper menu bar are activated.

X To select theXZY arrow to navigate in the menu: turn the controller. The active arrow is highlighted.

X To select a menu entry: press the control- ler. The next menu entry in the direction of the arrow is highlighted.

X To call up a highlightedmenu entry: turn the controller until OK is highlighted.

X Press the controller. The selected DVD scene is played.

X To hideDVD functions: select& using the controller.

X Press the controller. The DVD functions are hidden.

If there are functions such as Display cam- era perspectives on the DVD, these are shown in the DVD functions menu. X To call up Display camera perspectives: turn and press the controller

Stop function X Show the DVD functions (Y page 244). X Interrupting playback

To select from the DVD functions menu: turn and press the controller. The display changes to. The video image is hidden.

X To continue playback: select. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted.

X To stop playback: select again while playback is interrupted.

X To start playback again: select. Playback restarts from the beginning.

Pause function X Show the DVD functions (Y page 244). X Pausing playback To select: turn and press the control- ler. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select.

Selecting a scene/chapter

If the film is divided into scenes or chapters, these can be selected directly while the film is running, or skipped forwards step by step. This is not possible at certain points for some DVDs (e.g. during the opening credits). It may also be possible to select the scene/ chapter from the functions stored on the DVD. X To skip forwards or back: in the video menu, turn the controller. The next or previous scene in the film is skipped to. i The DVD functions can also be used to make selections (Y page 244).

Video DVD mode 245

M ed ia

Z

Picture viewer

General notes If there are pictures on the active data medium, you can view them on the COMAND display. The following data media and picture formats are supported: RData medium: MEDIA REGISTER, CD, DVD, USB devices, SD memory cards R Picture formats: jpeg, jpg, bmp, png The maximum image resolution is 20 mega- pixels It is not possible to view a picture from the driver's side while the vehicle is in motion.

Displaying pictures

X In the media basic display, press the con- troller. The Search with a category list appears.

X To select Photos in the category list: turn and press the controller. A directory list appears. Folders and picture files can be shown.

X Select a folder or picture. If there is no picture on the data medium, an empty list is shown. You can search for pictures on other data media.

Searching for pictures on other data media X In the directory list, slide XV the controller. The device list appears.

Example: the directory list displays the existing picture files X To select a data medium with picture files: turn the controller and press to confirm. A directory list appears. Folders and picture files can be shown.

X Select a folder or picture.

Starting a slide show X While viewing a picture, press the control- ler. The image menu appears.

X To select Start Slideshow: turn and press the controller. The slide show starts.

X To end the slide show: press the controller. The image menu appears.

X Select End Slide Show.

246 Picture viewer M ed ia

Changing the picture view

X Press the controller. The image menu appears.

X To select Turn Clockwise: turn and press the controller. The picture rotates 90 degrees.

X Select Turn Counterclockwise. The picture rotates 90 degrees.

X Select Zoom In. The size of the picture increases. After you have zoomed into the picture, you can move the section of the picture.

X To move the section of the picture: slide ZV and XVY the controller.

X To revert to the original size: press the con- troller

or X Press the% button.

Closing the picture viewer X Press the controller. The menu appears.

X To select Close Picture Viewer: turn and press the controller. COMAND returns to the last accessed media function.

Picture viewer 247

M ed ia

Z

248

Your COMAND equipment ................ 250 Sound settings .................................. 250 Burmester surround sound sys- tem ..................................................... 252 Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system .................................... 254

249

So un d

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Sound settings

Calling up the sound menu You can make various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. It is possi- ble to set more bass for radio mode than for audio CD mode, for example. The respective sound menu can be called up from the menu of the desired mode. The example describes where to call up the sound menu in CD mode.

X Insert an audio CD (Y page 212). The CD display appears.

X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu appears with the last setting accessed, e.g. Balance/Fader.

Sound menu overview

Function Options

Equalizer Sets: treble, mid- range and base

Balance/fader Moves the sound focus: right/left and front/rear

Changing loud- speaker source

Outputs a seat- based media source on the entire sound system

Setting treble, mid-range and bass

X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Equalizer is brought to the front.

X To activate rotary menus for treble, mid- range and base: slideV the controller.

X To switch between the rotary menus: slide XVY the controller.

X To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn the controller. Rotary menus show the set values.

250 Sound settings So un d

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Adjusting the balance/fader

Balance moves the focus of the sound between left and right. Fader moves the focus of the sound between front and rear. X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is brought to the front.

X To activate rotary menus for balance and fader: slideV the controller.

X To switch between the rotary menus: slide XVY the controller.

X To set the desired Balance/Fader setting: turn the controller. Rotary menus and the image show the sound focus set.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Changing loudspeaker source

Select Sound Source specifies which seat- based media source shall be output on the speaker system. Example: a media source is being listened to using headphones in the left-hand rear seat. Rear Left must be selected in Select Sound Source if the samemedia source is to be listened to using the sound system. i If the loudspeaker source is set to a seat where no playback is activated, nothing can be heard on the vehicle loudspeaker.

X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Select Sound Source is in the center.

X To activate the rotary menu for the speaker source: slideV the controller.

X To set the desired speaker source: turn the controller. The segment, text and image show the selected setting.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Sound settings 251

So un d

Burmester surround sound system

General notes The Burmester surround sound system has a total output of 590 watts and is equipped with 13 loudspeakers. The Burmester surround sound system is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.

Calling up the sound menu You can make various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. It is possi- ble to set more bass for radio mode than for audio CD mode, for example. The respective soundmenu is called up from themenu of the desired mode. The example shows the sound menu control panel in CD mode.

X Insert an audio CD (Y page 212). The CD display appears.

X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu appears with the last setting accessed, e.g. Balance/Fader.

Overview of Burmester surround sound sys- tem

Function Options

Equalizer Sets: treble, mid- range and base

Balance/fader Moves the sound focus: right/left and front/rear

Changing loud- speaker source

Outputs a seat- based media source on the entire sound system

Surround Optimizes sound playback for all seats

Setting treble, mid-range and bass

X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the center.

X SlideV the controller. The rotary menus for treble, mid-range and bass are activated.

X To switch between the rotary menus: slide XVY the controller.

252 Burmester surround sound system So un d

X To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn the controller. The rotary menus show the set values.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Adjusting the balance/fader

Balance moves the focus of the sound between left and right. Fader moves the focus of the sound between front and rear. X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is in the center.

X SlideV the controller. The rotary menus for balance and fader are activated.

X To switch between the rotary menus: slide XVY .

X To set the desired Balance/Fader setting: turn the controller. Rotarymenu and the image show the sound focus set.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Changing loudspeaker source

Select Sound Source specifies which seat- based media source shall be output on the speaker system. Example: someone is sitting in the Driver seat and is listening to the radio via the Multi- Seat Entertainment System (MSE). He doesn't want to listen using headphones, but instead using the sound system. Then select Driver in Select Sound Source. X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Select Sound Source is in the center.

X Activate the rotary menus for the Select Sound Source. SlideV the controller.

X To set the desired speaker source: turn the controller. The segment, text and image show the selected setting.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Burmester surround sound system 253

So un d

Setting surround sound

The Surround setting optimizes the sound playback for the selected seat position. X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Surround is in the center.

X SlideV the controller. The left-hand rotary menu to switch sur- round sound on and off is activated.

X To activate Surround: turn the controller until On is active.

X To adjust the surround sound for Front, Rear or All Seats: slideVY the control- ler. The right-hand rotary menu is activated.

X To set the desired Surround focus: turn the controller. The menu symbol, text and image show the selected setting.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system

General notes The Burmester high-end 3D surround sound systemhas a total output of 1540watts and is equipped with 24 loudspeakers. The Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.

Calling up the sound menu You can make various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. It is possi- ble to set more bass for radio mode than for audio CD mode, for example. You can call up the respective sound menu from the menu of the desired mode. The example describes where to call up the sound menu in CD mode.

X Insert an audio CD (Y page 212). The CD display appears.

X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. A menu appears with the last setting accessed, e.g. Sound Profile.

254 Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system So un d

Overview of Burmester high-end 3D sur- round sound system

Function Options

Equalizer Sets: treble, mid- range and base

Balance/fader Moves the sound focus: right/left and front/rear

Changing loud- speaker source

Outputs a seat- based media source on the entire sound system

VIP & BAL selection Optimizes sound playback for individ- ual seats

Sound profile Five defined sound settings: PURE/ EASY LISTENING/ LIVE/SURROUND/ 3D SOUND

Setting treble, mid-range and bass

X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the center.

X SlideV the controller. Rotary menus for treble, mid-range and bass are activated.

X To switch between the rotary menus: slide XVY the controller.

X To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn the controller. Rotary menus show the set values.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Adjusting the balance/fader

You can use balance to move the focus of the sound between left and right. You can use fader to shift the focus of the sound between the front and rear seats. X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is in the center.

X SlideV the controller. Rotary menus for balance and fader are activated.

X To switch between the rotary menus: slide XVY the controller.

Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system 255

So un d

X To set the desired Balance/Fader setting: turn the controller. Rotarymenu and the image show the sound focus set.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Changing loudspeaker source

Select Sound Source specifies which seat- based media source shall be output on the speaker system. Example: a media source is being listened to using headphones in the Rear Right. Rear Right must be selected in Select Sound Source if the same media source is to be lis- tened to using the sound system. X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Select Sound Source is in the center.

X SlideV the controller. Rotary menus for the speaker source are activated.

X To set the desired speaker source: turn the controller. The segment, text and image show the selected setting.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

VIP & BAL selection

The VIP & BAL Selection setting can be used to select sound optimization for a spe- cific seat, e.g. Rear Left. X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until VIP & BAL Selection is in the center.

X To activate the left-hand rotary menu to switch VIP & BAL Selection on and off: slideV the controller.

X To activate VIP & BAL Selection: turn the controller until On is active.

X To activate the right-hand rotary menu: slideVY the controller.

X To set the desired VIP & BAL Selection: turn the controller. The segment, text and image show the selected setting, e.g. for Rear Left.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

256 Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system So un d

Setting the sound profile With the Sound Profile setting, you can select between five defined sound settings.

Sound profile for high-end sound system

Description

Pure Audiophile sound playback without additional effects

Easy Listening Subtly mellowed acoustics for laid- back listening over long periods

Live Spectacular sound settings with live- performance char- acteristics

Surround Enhanced surround sound for mono and stereo recordings

3D Sound Three-dimensional listening experience

X To display the menu bars: slideV the controller in media mode.

X To select Sound in the menu bar: turn and press the controller. The menu with the last accessed setting appears.

X Turn the controller until Sound Profile is in the center.

X SlideV the controller. The rotary menu to select the sound profile is activated.

X To select Sound Profile: turn the con- troller until the desired sound profile is acti- vated.

X To return to the menu: slide ZV the con- troller.

X To return to the basicmenu: press the% button briefly.

Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system 257

So un d

258

Your COMAND equipment ................ 260 Rear Seat Entertainment System overview ............................................ 260 System settings ................................ 268 Vehicle settings ................................ 270 Navigation mode ............................... 271 Online and Internet functions .......... 271 Radio mode ........................................ 272 Media mode ....................................... 272 Audio/video mode ............................ 273 Video DVD mode ............................... 276 AUX mode .......................................... 280

259

Re ar Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of pur- chase. Country-specific differences are pos- sible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Rear Seat Entertainment System overview

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING If objects such as headphones/headsets or external audio/video sources are not secured in the passenger compartment, they can be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, for example in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direc- tion. Always stow these items or similar objects carefully so that they cannot be flung around, for example in a lockable vehicle stowage compartment.

Components The Rear Seat Entertainment System includes: Rtwo screens for the rear behind the front- seat head restraints Rtwo remote controls for the rear compart- ment Ra CD/DVD drive in the rear compartment RAUX jacks Rtwo USB ports Rtwo sets of cordless headphones

General notes RYou can only adjust the volume for the headphones supplied, directly on the head- phones. RIf media from different sources are used, they can be used separately from each of the operating positions. Example: a film from the DVD drive is played on the rear right-hand operating position. This means that another film from the same DVD can- not be played separately on the rear left- hand operating position. However, on the rear left-hand operating position, it is pos- sible to use the radio, TV, memory card, MUSIC REGISTER, media interface, USB, online and Internet functions or AUX. RIf you use the same medium on both sides, you can both carry out the respective set- tings. The "last one wins" principle applies here, i.e. the last setting activated is favored. RThe Internet can be used separately at all operating positions. RThe Internet can only be used if it is set up and connected via a telephone (Y page 173).

260 Rear Seat Entertainment System overview Re ar Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Rear-compartment screens

: Display ; Brightness sensor = Switches the display on/off ? Socket for headphones Setting the display angle X Press the CAR button on the remote control.

X Press the: button on the remote control.

X Using the= buttons on the remote control, select Display and confirm by pressing 9.

X Select Tilt Display. X Select Upward or Downward. The display tilts upward or downward.

Remote control

Overview

: Selects main menus ; Selects the screen for the remote control = Selector wheel for selecting menus, radio

stations, music tracks and chapters ? Buttons for selecting menus A Deletes an entry B Skip-back function, fast forward/rewind,

start/pause, menu selection, radio sta- tions, music tracks and chapters

C Direct selection of radio stations, music tracks and chapters using the number keypad

D Volume, switches sound on/off (for corded headphones)

E Back button F Confirms your selection G Indicator lamp H Switches the screen on/off

i Two remote controls are supplied for the US and Canadian markets.

Rear Seat Entertainment System overview 261

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Selecting the screen for the remote control

You can use the remote control to operate one of the two rear screens at a time. To do so, you must switch the remote control to the desired screen. X To select the left-hand screen: turn thumb- wheel: until "L REAR" appears in the win- dow.

X To select the right-hand screen: turn the thumbwheel until "REAR R" appears in the window.

X To select the COMAND screen: turn thumb- wheel: until "COMAND" appears in the window.

i Please be aware that using the thumb- wheel to select screens may cause unwanted changes to the screens of your occupants. Up to four remote controls can be used in the vehicle at the same time.

Switching the screen on/off If the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in posi- tion 0 or 1, or if the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock, the rear screens will switch off after 30 minutes. Before the screens switch off, they show a message to this effect. You can switch the screens back on.

i Please note that this may cause the starter battery to discharge.

X Press button: on the remote control. The respective rear-compartment screen switches on or off. i You can only switch the screens on using the remote control if the ignition is switched on.

Switching the button lighting on/off X Lighting of the remote control buttons is divided into three areas. The corresponding area is activated every time you press a button. It switches off again automatically 5 to 10 seconds after the last button has been pressed.

262 Rear Seat Entertainment System overview Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Switching the sound on/off (corded headphones only)

X Press button: on the remote control. The sound is switched on/off.

Selecting a menu

RButtons: are used to directly access the corresponding main menu. RUsing selector wheel= or the =9: buttons, select a menu. To confirm your selection, press the 9 button.

Indicator lamp on the remote control The color of the indicator lamp shows whether or not the entry has been correctly transmitted every time you press a button. It also shows the condition of the inserted bat- teries.

LED dis- play

Status

Green (flashes once)

Entry being transmitted. The batteries are fine.

Red (flashes once)

Entry being transmitted. The batteries are almost dis- charged.

Orange (flashes three times)

Entry not correctly transmit- ted.

Unlit The batteries are discharged.

i The function of the remote control may be impaired by other radio-based electronic devices such as mobile phones or laptops.

Rear Seat Entertainment System overview 263

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Operation via smartphone

: Skip back button for selected rear com- partment displays

; To select and display active rear compart- ment displays

= Controller ? Remote control menu bar A To skip forward B To increase the volume in the vehicle

interior C To reduce the volume in the vehicle inter-

ior D To show the number or alphabetical key-

pad E To skip back F To start/pause You can also operate the Rear Seat Enter- tainment System using a smartphone. In order to be able to use this function, you will need to download an app from Google

Play Store (Android) or Apple iTunes and install this on your smartphone. Further information on connecting and using smartphones with COMAND can be found in the app description in the GooglePlay Store (Android) or Apple iTunes.

CD/DVD drive

: CD/DVD slot ; CD/DVD eject button Depending on the vehicle model and equip- ment level, the CD/DVD drive is found: Rat the rear of the center console under the automatic climate control panel or Rbetween the parcel shelf and skibag.

AUX jacks

: AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal (red)

; AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal (white)

= AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)

264 Rear Seat Entertainment System overview Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Depending on the vehicle model and equip- ment level, the AUX jacks are found: Rin the stowage box between the rear seats or Rin the rear-compartment armrest.

USB ports

: USB port 1 ; USB port 2 Depending on the vehicle model and equip- ment level, the USB ports are found: Rin the stowage box between the rear seats or Rin the rear-compartment armrest.

Rear Seat Entertainment System overview 265

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Cordless headphones

Overview

X To adjust the headphones: open both sides of the headphones. X Adjust the fit of the headphones by pulling the headphone band in the direction of the arrow. X To switch the headphones on/off: press on/off switch;. X To adjust the volume: turn volume control= until the desired volume is set. If you have connected corded headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you can adjust the volume using the remote control (Y page 261).

X To check the battery condition of charge: check the state of the batteries using indicator lamp:.

i To preserve the batteries, the headphones automatically switch off if they have not received an audio signal for approximately 3 minutes.

Indicator lamp on the cordless head- phones The color of the indicator lamp shows: Rwhether the device is switched on or off Rthe condition of the inserted batteries.

LED dis- play

Status

Green The batteries are fine.

Red The batteries are almost dis- charged.

Lit contin- uously

The headphones are switched on and connected to a screen.

LED dis- play

Status

Flashing The headphones are search- ing for the connection to a screen.

No display (dark)

The headphones are switched off or the batteries are dis- charged.

i The function of the headphones may be impaired by other radio-based electronic devices such as mobile phones or laptops.

266 Rear Seat Entertainment System overview Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Selecting the screen for the head- phones

X Set switch: to L (left-hand screen) or R (right-hand screen).

Connecting additional headphones Up to two cordless headphones can be used at the same time for each screen. You can also connect one additional set of corded headphones to each of the two rear- compartment screens (Y page 261). The socket is designed for headphones with a 3.5mm stereo jack plug and an impedance of 32 ohms.

Replacing batteries

Notes

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seekmedical attention immediately.

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used bat- teries.

Batteries are required for the remote control and for the two sets of cordless headphones. The batteries can be replaced.

H Environmental note Dispose of discharged batteries in an envi- ronmentally responsible manner.

Replacing the batteries of the remote control

: Battery compartment ; Catch tab = Battery compartment cover

Rear Seat Entertainment System overview 267

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

? Retaining lugs A Batteries The remote control contains two type AAA, 1.5 V batteries. X To open the battery compartment: remove battery compartment cover= on the back of the remote control.

X Push catch tab; down and take off bat- tery compartment cover=.

X Remove discharged batteriesA from the tray.

X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polar- ity markings on the batteries and battery compartment when doing so. Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face upwards. Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face downwards.

X To close the battery compartment: insert battery compartment cover= start- ing with retaining lugs? into the battery compartment and allow catch tab; to engage in place.

Replacing cordless headphone batter- ies

The battery compartment is located on the left headphone. The cordless headphones require two type AAA, 1.5 V batteries.

X To open the battery compartment: turn battery compartment cover: counter- clockwise and remove.

X Remove the discharged batteries from the tray.

X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polar- ity markings on the batteries and battery tray when doing so.

X To close the battery compartment: replace battery housing cover: and turn it clockwise until it engages. If the batteries have been inserted cor- rectly, the indicator lamp will light up green when the headphones are switched on.

i The operating duration of the headphones with a set of batteries is up to 40 hours.

System settings

General notes You can adjust all system settings individually for each screen without affecting the other screen. To do this, please use the remote control (Y page 261).

Selecting the display language X Select Vehicle using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Press the: button on the remote control. A menu appears.

X Select System Settings using the: =; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. You see the System Settings menu on the selected rear screen.

268 System settings Re ar Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

X Select Language using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm. The list of languages appears. A# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the language using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. The system activates the corresponding language.

Switching the display design X Select Vehicle using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select System Settings using the: =; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. You see the System Settings menu on the selected rear screen.

X Select Display using the9: but- tons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Auto matic using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot indicates the current setting.

Design Explanation

Day Mode The display is set per- manently to day design.

Night Mode The display is set per- manently to night design.

Automatic The display design changes depending on the vehicle instrument cluster illumination.

Setting the brightness X Select Vehicle using the 9:=; buttons on the

remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select System Settings using the: =; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. You see the System Settings menu on the selected rear screen.

X Select Display using the9: but- tons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Brightness using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. A scale appears.

X Adjust the brightness using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. The brightness bar moves up or down. The picture becomes lighter or darker in accordance with the scale.

Showing/hiding the picture X Select Vehicle using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Press button: on the remote control. A menu appears.

X Select Display Off using the 9:=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To display the picture: press the 9 but- ton.

Adjusting sound settings You can select the sound settings in the radio, audio CD/audio DVD/MP3, video DVD and AUX modes. X Select a medium (e.g. audio CD mode) (Y page 274).

X To show the menu: press the: button on the remote control.

System settings 269

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

X Select Sound using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Treble, Mid or Bass using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select the desired setting using the selec- tor wheel on the remote control.

X To exit the menu: press the% button on the remote control.

Picture settings

Overview You can select the picture settings in video DVD and AUX mode.

Adjusting the brightness, contrast and color

X Switch on video DVD mode (Y page 276). X To show themenu: press the9 button on the remote control.

X Select using the=; buttons and press the 9 to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Options using the:=; buttons and press the9button to confirm.

X Select Video Settings using the:=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select the setting using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Changing the picture format X Switch on video DVD mode (Y page 276). X To show themenu: press the9 button on the remote control.

X Select using the=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Options using the:=; buttons and press the9button to confirm.

X Select Video Settings using the:=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot in front of one of the menu items 16:9 or 4:3 indicates the format currently selected.

X Select the format using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Vehicle settings

You can change the vehicle settings from the rear compartment. You can make the following changes: RExtend seat heating to switch the arm rest panel heating in the rear compartment on/ off RSeat settings X Changing vehicle settings: select Vehi cle using the9=; buttons on

270 Vehicle settings Re ar Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. You will see a menu with the available vehi- cle functions.

X Select Vehicle Settings or Seat Set tings using the=; buttons.

X Press the 9 button on the remote control. Further information on seat settings (Y page 63). Further information on panel heating (Y page 59).

i The panel heating in the rear compart- ment is available if the key in the ignition lock is in position 1 or 2.

Navigation mode

Navigation functions such as the compass can be used in the rear compartment. Calling up Drive Information X Press the button on the remote control. You will see the current navigation infor- mation.

Calling up the compass X Press the button on the remote control.

X Press the: button on the remote control. A menu appears.

X Using the remote control, select Menu. X Using the remote control, select Compass.

Calling up the online map display i An Internet connection is required to use the online map display (Y page 173).

X Press the button on the remote control.

X Press the: button on the remote control. A menu appears.

X Using the remote control, select Menu. X Using the remote control, select Online Map Display.

Online and Internet functions

You can use online and Internet functions in the rear compartment. You can choose from the following Internet functions: RWeather RInternet RMercedes-Benz Apps RInternet radio RMercedes-Benz Mobile Website Using Internet functions: X Press button on the remote control. A menu appears.

X Select the online/Internet function required.

Calling up the Internet functions menu: X Press the% button on the remote control while using the Internet function.

Exiting the Internet functions: X Press the% button on the remote control. A menu appears.

X Select the symbol in the menu and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm.

or X Select another function (e.g. Media or Radio).

Online and Internet functions 271

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Radio mode

X To switch on: press the $ button on the remote control. Radio mode starts.

Further information on radio mode (Y page 198).

Media mode

Activating media mode There are several ways to activate media sources using COMAND. The relevant sections of the Operator's Man- ual describe the simplest way to activate a media source. This section describes all options for activat- ing media sources.

Using the MEDIA button X Press the button on the remote control. The menu for the last accessed media source appears.

X To select the media source: keep press- ing the button on the remote control until the required media source has been set. If playablemusic files are found, theywill be played by COMAND.

Switching on automatically If COMAND is only active at one operating position in the rear compartment, the respec- tivemediumwill switch on automatically once connected/inserted. If a media function is already switched on in COMAND, this will be interrupted and the basic display of the newly connected/ inserted medium will appear. If COMAND is being operated in another func- tion, such as navigation, when an external

media source is connected/inserted, the basic display will not change. Only the music from the newly connected data carrier will play.

Starting media playback using the main function bar

X To show the menu: press the9 button on the remote control.

X Select Media using the=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To select the media source: turn the selec- tor wheel on the remote control.

or X Press the=; buttons on the remote control. The menu appears with the available media sources.

X Press button 9 on the remote control. If the disc contains music or video files, these will be played. The corresponding basic menu will be shown.

272 Media mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Starting media using the device list

X Press the button on the remote control.

X To show the menu: press the: button on the remote control.

X Using the:=; buttons on the remote control, select Devices. The discs/devices available are shown. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the device/disc using the:9 buttons and press the9button to confirm. If the device/disc contains music or video files, these will be played.

Music search The media source has already been selected: X Press button: on the remote control. The menu is shown.

X Select Search using the=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

The media source has not been selected yet: X To select the media source: keep pressing the button on the remote control until the desired media source has been set.

X Press button: on the remote control. The menu is shown.

X Select Search using the=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

Further information on the music search (Y page 220).

Audio/video mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

General notes You will find information on the following top- ics in the Audio section: Rnotes on CDs/DVDs (Y page 220) Rnotes on MP3 mode (Y page 219) Rnotes on copyright (Y page 220)

Inserting a CD/DVD

: Disc slot ; Disc eject button

Audio/video mode 273

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Depending on the vehicle model and equip- ment level, the CD/DVD drive is found: Rat the rear of the center console under the automatic climate control panel or Rbetween the parcel shelf and skibag. The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If there is already a disc inserted, this must be ejected before another is inserted. X Insert a disc into the disc slot. The printed side of the disc must face upwards. If neither side of the disc is printed, the side you wish to play must face downwards. The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc.

The CD/DVD drive plays the disc: Rif it has been inserted correctly and is a permissible disc, and Ronce you have activated disc mode. Data on anMP3CD first needs to be loaded by the drive. Loading may take some time, depending on the number of folders and tracks.

Switching to audio/video mode X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 264). The system loads the inserted disc and starts playback.

or X Select Media using the9=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Disc using the=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The system plays the disc.

X To switch to other media: insert the device into the corresponding jack. The system searches for files on the device that can be played back, and then plays them.

Selecting a track

Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or backwards to a track: press the= or; button on the remote control.

or X Press theE orF button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8 seconds, the function skips back to the beginning of the track. If the elapsed time is shorter, it will skip to the start of the pre- vious track. If the Random Tracks or Random Folder playback option has been selected, the track order is random.

Selecting by track list In audio CD mode, the track list contains all tracks on the disc currently playing. InMP3mode, the track list shows all tracks in the currently active folder aswell as the folder structure, allowing you to select any track on the MP3 CD. X Select Search using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Current Tracklist using the 9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm. The track list appears. The# dot indicates the current track.

X Select the track using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Making a selectionby entering the track number directly This function is only available in Media mode. X Press theh button on the remote control. The track entry display appears.

274 Audio/video mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Example: track 2 X Press number button 2. Example: track 12 X Press the corresponding number keys in rapid succession.

X Wait for approximately three seconds after making the entry. You will hear the track which has been entered. The corresponding basic menu then reappears. i It is not possible to enter numbers that exceed the number of tracks on theCDor in the currently active folder.

Fast forwarding/rewinding X With the display/selection window active, press the= or; button on the remote control repeatedly until you reach the desired position.

or X Press and hold theE orF button until the desired position is reached.

Selecting a folder This function is only available in MP3 mode. X Select Search using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Folder using the:=; buttons and press the9button to confirm. The folder content appears.

X To switch to the next folder up: press the = button on the remote control. The display shows the next folder up.

X Select the folder with the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm. You will see the tracks in the folder.

X Select the track using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm. The track is played and the corresponding folder is now the active folder.

Pause/Playback X To pause playback: press the; / button on the remote control. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: press the; / button. The display changes to.

Playback options X Select Options using the:=; buttons and press the9button to confirm.

X The options list appears. The# dot indi- cates the option currently selected.

X Select Normal Track Sequence, Random Tracks or Random Folder using the 9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal Track Sequence, you will see a corresponding display in the display/ selection window. i If you switch the data carrier which you are currently listening to, the Normal Track Sequence option is activated auto- matically. If an option is selected, it remains selected after the system is switched on or off.

Switching track information on/off If the function is switched on, the information saved in the audio files, such as track, artist or album, will be shown (if available). If the function is switched off, the names of the files and folders on the disc are shown. X Select Options using the:=; buttons and press the9button to confirm.

X Select Show Track Information using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

Audio/video mode 275

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Video DVD mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

General notes

DVD playback conditions Playback problems may occur when playing copied discs. There is a large variety of discs, DVD authoring software, writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the system will be able to play videoDVDs you have copied your- self. More information on the playback criteria (Y page 241).

Function restrictions Depending on the DVD, certain functions or actions may be temporarily blocked or not function at all. As soon as you try to activate these functions, you will see theK symbol in the display.

Switching to video DVD mode X Insert a video DVD (Y page 264). The system loads the disc. If disc mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active.

X Manually switch to video DVD mode: repeatedly press the button on the

remote control until the video DVDmode is switched on. If the video DVD fulfills the playback crite- ria, the film starts automatically or the DVD menu appears. If the DVD menu appears, you must start the film manually.

X Select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu.

Video menu

: Type of data medium ; Current title = Shows the menu bars for the DVD basic

display ? Current scene A Track time X To show: press the9 or: button on the remote control.

X To hide: press the9 or: button. or X Wait about eight seconds.

276 Video DVD mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Overview of DVD functions

: Activates DVD control menu ; Hides DVD functions = Shows the DVD basic display ? Confirms entry in control menu A Navigates DVD lists B Jumps to the start of the scene C Displays camera perspectives D Shows subtitles E Selects language F Stop function G Pause function X To show: press the 9 button on the remote control.

X To hide: press the% button on the remote control.

Fast forwarding/rewinding X Press and hold theE orF button on the remote control until the desired posi- tion has been reached. You see the control menu.

Pause function X To show themenu: press the9 button on the remote control.

X To pause playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The menu is hidden.

Stop function X To show themenu: press the9 button on the remote control.

X To interrupt playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to. The video image is hidden.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. The menu is hidden.

X To stop playback: while playback is inter- rupted, select again and press 9 to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the begin- ning of the DVD. is highlighted.

X To restart playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the DVD.

Selecting a scene/chapter

General notes Observe the information on DVD video mode (Y page 245).

Skipping forwards/backwards X Press= or; on the remote control. The control menu appears for approx- imately eight seconds.

Selecting a scene/chapter directly These examples illustrate how to select scene/chapter 5.

Video DVD mode 277

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

X Option 1: while the film is playing, press theh button on the remote control.

X Press the corresponding number key, such as 5.

X Option 2: while the film is playing, press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select Menu and press the 9 button to confirm. The DVD menu appears.

X Select Scene Selection and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Using button9 or:, select 5 and press the 9 button to confirm. In both cases, playback will begin from the 5th scene/chapter after a brief pause.

Selecting a film/track Option 1: X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select Menu using the9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The DVD menu appears.

X Select Track Selection using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To call up the selection list: press the 9 button.

X Select a film/track. Option 2: Example: selecting film 2 X Press button 2. After a brief pause, the second film is played.

DVD menu

Calling up the DVD menu TheDVDmenu is themenu stored on theDVD itself. It is structured in various ways accord- ing to the individual DVD and permits certain actions and settings. In the case of multi-language DVDs, for exam- ple, you can change the DVD language in the DVD menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select Menu using the9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The DVD menu appears.

Selecting menu items in the DVD menu X Select a menu item using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Select using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The system executes the function or shows a submenu.

X If available, additional options can now be selected. The system then switches back to the DVD menu.

i Menu items which cannot be selected are shown in gray.

i Depending on the DVD, certain menu items may not function. For example, the menu items: RBack (to film) RPlay RStop RE

RF

RGo Up.

278 Video DVD mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

To indicate this, theK symbol appears in the display.

Stopping a film or skipping to the begin- ning or end of a scene X Select any menu item from the DVD menu. The menu appears.

X To stop the film: select the Stop menu item and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X To skip to the end of a scene: select the F menu item and press 9 to confirm.

X To skip to the start of a scene: select the E menu item and press 9 to confirm.

Moving up one level in the DVD menu X Show the DVD menu. X Press the% back button on the remote control or select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu.

Back to the film X Press the% back button repeatedly until you see the movie.

Setting the audio format This function is not available on all DVDs. If it is available, you can set the audio language or the audio format. The number of settings is determined by the DVD content. It may also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Audio Language and press the 9 button to confirm. A menu appears after a short while. The # dot in front of an entry indicates the cur- rently selected language.

X Select the language using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.

Subtitles and camera angle These functions are not available on all DVDs. The number of subtitle languages and camera angles available depends on the content of theDVD. Itmay also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and press the 9 button to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few seconds. The# dot in front of an entry indi- cates the current setting.

X Select the setting using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.

Interactive content DVDs can also contain interactive content (e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may be able to influence events by selecting and triggering actions. The type and number of actions depend on the DVD.

Video DVD mode 279

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

X Select an action using the 9;:= buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to execute it. Amenu appears and the first entry, Select, is highlighted.

X Press the 9 button.

AUX mode

General notes You can connect an external video source in the rear compartment. Depending on the vehicle model and equip- ment level, the AUX jacks are found: Rin the stowage box between the rear seats or Rin the rear-compartment armrest (Y page 264).

Please see the corresponding operating instructions for information on how to oper- ate the external video source. For further details about external video sour- ces, please consult an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

Connecting AUX equipment X Insert the audio plugs for the left and right signals into the corresponding L and R jacks.

X Insert the video plug into the V jack.

Activating AUX mode X Select AUX using the9=; but- tons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The AUX source is switched on once the AUX device is active.

280 AUX mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Your COMAND equipment ................ 282 SIRIUS Weather ................................ 282

281

SI RI US

W ea th er

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the fea- tures described.

SIRIUS Weather

Introduction This function is currently not available for Canada. For the reception of weather forecasts via satellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM Sat- ellite Weather subscription. If the message Call SIRIUS to activate system at: SIRIUS_number ESN: SIRIUS_ID appears along with the ID number of the SIRIUS device, youwill need to have the weather service activated first. X To select Call or Cancel: turn and press the controller. If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND (Y page 138), the call will connect to a SIR- IUS service employee after selecting Call. The ID number of the SIRIUS device will be transferred to the telephone display.

X This will be followed by instructions from the service employee.

COMAND can receive weather forecasts via satellite radio for the entire USA (including Alaska and Hawaii). The received weather data can be displayed as an information chart (daily forecast, five-day forecast, detailed information) or on the weather map. The weather data received from a weather station is stored in COMAND for one hour. It can therefore be displayed again immediately after restarting the engine (for example after refueling).

Depending on which scale has been selected, the weather map can display the following weather data with symbols: Rrain radar Rstorm characteristics Rareas of high-pressure/low-pressure, weather fronts Rcourse of tropical cyclones (hurricanes, typhoons) Rgale warnings Rwind direction and speeds

i The rain radar cannot be displayed for Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.

i Hurricane: termused to describe the trop- ical cyclones that primarily develop in the Atlantic, North Pacific and South Pacific oceans. Thewind speeds are above 74mph (118 km/h). Five categories are used to classify the strength of a hurricane. Typhoon: term used to describe a tropical cyclone that develops in the northwestern Pacific. Thewind speeds are in the category of a hurricane.

Switching the SIRIUSWeather display on/off

Switching on

282 SIRIUS Weather SI RI US

W ea th er

X Select TEL/ in the main function bar by sliding5 , turning and pressing the con- troller. Themenu for selecting telephone and Inter- net applications appears.

X To select SIRIUS Weather: turn and press the controller. The information chart shows the daily fore- cast at the current vehicle position.

You see the following information: Rthe date and time of the weather message received last Rinformation on the current weather (tem- perature, cloud cover) and forecast for the next 3, 6, 12 hours Rthe current highest temperature and fore- casts Rthe current lowest temperature and fore- casts Rthe probability of rain Switching to the 5-day forecast: X To select Current: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select 5-Day. The information chart displays the forecast for the next five days in the currently selected location.

Returning to the current-day forecast: X To select 5-Day: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select Current. The information chart shows the forecast for the current day again.

Deactivating X Press%.

Displaying detailed information

Besides the current temperatures, you can display information such as wind speeds and UV index. X To select Current or 5-Day in the current or 5-day forecast: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears.

X Select Info. The information chart shows detailed infor- mation for the selected area.

Selecting the area for the weather forecast

Introduction You can select the following areas: Rthe current vehicle position Rvicinity of the destination Ra winter sports area Ran area within the USA

SIRIUS Weather 283

SI RI US

W ea th er

You can select a location in the information chart (option 1) or in the map (option 2). You also have the option of selecting a location from the memory (Y page 285). In order to select a location from the memory, you must have previously saved a location.

i COMAND receives weather forecast data from the nearest weather station at the selected location.

Option 1: selecting the area in the infor- mation chart X To select Position in the information chart: turn and press the controller.

X To select the current vehicle position: select Current Position in the menu. COMAND receives the weather data for the current vehicle position from the nearest weather station and displays it automati- cally.

Requirement for "Near destination": a route to a destination has been calculated (Y page 86). The menu item is otherwise grayed out. X To select the vicinity of the destination: select Near Destination: turn and press the controller.

X To select awinter sports area: select At Ski Area from the menu: turn the control- ler and press to confirm.

X Select a state, e.g. Colorado. X Select a winter sports area from the menu. The weather data and other information is displayed for the winter sports area that

has been selected. The data is supplied by the nearest weather station.

The information chart shows the following information (if available): Rski slopes/ski lifts Rsnowboarding and nighttime opening Rsnow conditions (e.g. snow depth) Rtemperature The status of a facility is indicated as follows: Rgreen tick - open Rred cross - closed Rquestion mark - not known

Example: city list with character bar Entry limitation: searching for a location using the character bar is not possiblewhile driving. X To search for a location: select Search Areas: turn the controller and press to con- firm.

X Select Other States (U.S.) or At Cur rent State/Province. Depending on the selection, the list of states or cities will appear with the charac-

284 SIRIUS Weather SI RI US

W ea th er

ter bar. You can limit the search using the character bar.

X To select state/province or city: enter the first few letters by turning and pressing the controller.

X To switch to the list without the character bar: slide5 or select ok.

X To delete an entry: select 2 in the char- acter bar and press the controller. Pressing briefly deletes the last letter entered. Pressing and holding longer deletes the entire entry.

X To select the state/province or city from the list: turn and press the controller. After selecting a state (or province) the list of locations appears. After selecting a location, the information chart displays the weather forecast for the selected location. The data is supplied by the nearest weather station.

Option 2: selecting the area in the weather map X Call up the weather map (Y page 286). X Move the weather map so that the cross- hair is over the desired area (Y page 286).

X Press the controller. The information chart shows the weather forecast for the selected area. The data is supplied by the nearest weather station.

Memory functions

Storing the area in theweathermemory You can save locations that are called up fre- quently in ten preset positions (0, 1-9) in the weather memory.

X In the weather memory: select the area for the weather forecast (Y page 283). The selected location appears at the top in the status bar.

X To select Position in the information chart: turn and press the controller.

X Select Presets. X Select a preset using the controller. X Press and hold the controller until you hear a tone. The area is entered on the selected preset.

Equipment with telephone keypad X To store rapidly: in the daily forecast (Y page 282) press and hold a number key, e.g.l, until the preset position number is shown in the status bar in front of the area name. i You can also use this function in the five- day forecast (Y page 282), and in the detailed information view (Y page 283).

Selecting an area from the weather memory X Directly from the weather memory: select Position from the information chart: turn and press the controller.

X Select Presets. X Select thememory position which contains the location you require. The weather data for the selected area is displayed.

Equipment with telephone keypad X Quick select: if a location is stored in the weather memory, for example when the current forecast display is active, briefly press a number key, e.g.l. The weather data for the selected area is displayed.

SIRIUS Weather 285

SI RI US

W ea th er

Weather map

Calling up the weather map

X To select Map in the information chart: turn and press the controller. The weather map is shown on a 500-mi (500-km) scale.

Moving the weather map X Slide4 or1 the controller. The weather mapmoves in the correspond- ing direction under the crosshair.

Changing the scale X Turn the controller. The scale bar appears.

X Turn until the desired scale is set.

Showing/hiding the menu in the weather map X To show: press the controller. X To hide: slide5 the controller.

Selecting a weather station in the map X Move the weathermap and crosshair to the desired position (Y page 286).

X To show the menu: press the controller. X To select Weather Table : press the con- troller. COMAND receives the weather data for the selected position from the nearest weather station and displays it automatically as a daily forecast.

Switching layers on the map on/off

You can switch on different layers, for exam- ple to display the rain radar, weather fronts and the course of tropical storms on the map. X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 286).

X To select View: turn and press the control- ler.

X Select a layer. Switch the display on O or off .

Explanation of the layers on the weather map RRadar Map Displays the rain radar as a color area in all map scales. For an explanation of the col- ors, see the legend (Y page 291). RStorm Characteristics Displays the characteristics of a storm in all map scales: - tornadic storm: storm cell with strong winds (super cell), from which a tornado can develop. Tor- nadoes are also known as twisters.

- cyclone: storm cells from which a tornadic storm can develop

- hailstorm - the likelihood of a hailstorm RStorm Watch Box Shows areas (in red) for which severe weather warnings have been issued. It is

286 SIRIUS Weather SI RI US

W ea th er

shown inmap scales 50mi (50 km), 200mi (200 km) and 500 mi (500 km). RAtmospheric Pressure Shows the position of high and low-pres- sure areas (H, L), weather fronts and iso- bars It is shown in map scales 200 mi (200 km) and 500 mi (500 km). RTropical Storm Tracking Shows the direction and speed of propaga- tion (track) of a tropical storm in all map scales with information on times and inten- sity. RWinds Shows thewind direction andwind speed in map scale of 5 mi (5 km).

SIRIUS Weather 287

SI RI US

W ea th er

Sample displays of weather data in the map

Displaying the rain radar: X Activate the Radar Map display level (Y page 286). The rain radar image is then displayed if weather data is available.

i You can call up the legend for the precipitation radar (Y page 291). The transparency of the radar map display level can be adjusted in 5 stages.

Displaying storm characteristics: X Activate the Storm Characteristics display level (Y page 286). If weather data is available, the weather map will then display the storm characteristics. You can call up the legend for storms (Y page 291). The following information on a storm cell is displayed (if available): Rcharacteristics of the storm cell Rdate and time of observation (time stamp) Rdirectional movement speed and path

288 SIRIUS Weather SI RI US

W ea th er

Displaying weather fronts: X Activate the Atmospheric Pressure display level (Y page 286). If weather data is available, the weather map will then display the weather fronts. The example shows the position of high and low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars. Isobars are lines that show where the air pressure is the same.

Legend: weather fronts

Weather front Explanation

Cold front (blue line with blue trian- gles)

If a cold front moves in, the weather remains changeable and there are often rain showers and thunderstorms. The air tem- perature decreases.

Warm front (red line with red semi- circles)

Awarm frontmay causemore prolonged steady rain,more cloud cover and a slow rise in temperature.

Stationary front (red and blue line with red semi-circles and blue tri- angles)

The weather front moves minimally. The weather remains changeable in this area.

Occlusion (purple line with purple semi-circles and trian- gles)

An occlusion arises when the faster cold front catches up and joins the warm front ahead of it. The weather remains change- able and rainy within an occlusion.

: Position on the forecast path ; Current position of the cyclone = Position on the previous path Displaying the track of a storm: X Activate the Tropical Storm Tracking display level (Y page 286). If weather data is available, the weather map will then display the track of the storm.

SIRIUS Weather 289

SI RI US

W ea th er

A dotted line shows the previous path and the forecast path of a tropical low-pressure area (cyclone).

You can find out more information about cyclones in the Storm Guide (Y page 292). Showing information (if available): Rname of the tropical storm and category Rtime stamp Rdirectional movement speed and path Rmaximum wind speed Propagation speed: the speed at which the storm cell of a tropical cyclone is advancing. A tropical storm is separated into different categories according to the location at which it develops.

Region of origin Category

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Menu item Tropical Low Press. Sys.

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Menu item Tropical Depression

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Menu item Name_1 (Tropical Storm)

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Menu item Name_1 (Hurricane Category Number_one_digit) Displays hurricane categories 1 through 5

Northwestern Pacific Ocean Menu item Tropical Low Press. Sys. Northwestern Pacific Ocean Menu item Name_LP10 (Tropical Cyclone) Northwestern Pacific Ocean Menu item Name_1 (Typhoon) Northwestern Pacific Ocean Menu item Name_1 (Super-Typhoon)

290 SIRIUS Weather SI RI US

W ea th er

You can also see the time stamp for the weather data on map scales of 50 miles and smaller. The weather map shows wind directions and wind speeds.

Legend (precipitation radar and storms)

X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 286). X To select View: turn and press the controller. X Select Legend. i The symbol for a tornadic storm is also valid for a cyclone (mesocyclone).

Precipitation type Color scale

Rain 11 shades from light (light green) to heavy (red)

Mixed Light (light violet) to heavy (violet)

Snow Light (light turquoise) to heavy (turquoise)

Time stamp The time stamp shows when the weather data was created by the weather station. A time stamp corresponds to the time at the vehicle's current position. The changeover from summer time to standard time is performed automatically. X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 286). X To select View: turn and press the controller. X Select Time Stamp. Changing to the information chart X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 286). X To select Weather Table: turn and press the controller.

SIRIUS Weather 291

SI RI US

W ea th er

Storm Watch Box

Storm watch areas for which there are storm advisories are displayed as red areas on the weather map. To activate/deactivate the display of areas in red: X To call up the menu from the weather map display: press the controller. X To select View: turn and press the controller. The list of display levels appears.

X Select Severe Weather Warnings. X Select Show Symbols for Storm Areas On Map. Depending on the previous setting, activate O or deactivate the display of areas in red.

Activating/deactivating the automatic display of warning popups: X Select Show Automatic Storm Watch Popups. Depending on the previous setting, activate O or deactivate the automatic display of warning popups.

Setting the radius for the popups: X Select 5 miles (5 km), 50 miles (50 km) or 200 miles (200 km). Storm Guide Displaying the Storm Guide:

X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 286).

X To select Guide: turn and press the con- troller. A menu appears. The current storm is high- lighted. There is information about the storm in the status bar.

292 SIRIUS Weather SI RI US

W ea th er

X To select Next: turn and press the control- ler. The next storm is marked.

X Select Previous. The previous storm is highlighted.

Showing storm details: X Select Details. You see detailed information about the selected storm.

SIRIUS Weather 293

SI RI US

W<

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the S-Class Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2015 Operating Instructions on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operating Instructions for Mercedes-Benz S-Class as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operating Instructions should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz S-Class. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2015 Operating Instructions is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2015 Operating Instructions consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2015 Operating Instructions free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2015 Operating Instructions, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz S-Class 2015 Operating Instructions as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.